VOLVO C70

Owner's manual Web Edition

Information Provided by: Provided Information Information Provided by:Provided Information Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating instructions in this manual. We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impairment that could hinder your ability to drive. Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and emission standards. For further information please contact your retailer, or: In the USA: of North America, LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552 www.volvocars.us In Canada: Volvo Cars of Canada Corp National Customer Service 175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 1-800-663-8255 www.volvocanada.com 2009 © Volvo Car Corporation, All rights reserved.

Information Provided by:Provided Information Contents

00 Introduction 01 Safety 02 Instruments and controls General information...... 10 Occupant safety...... 16 Instrument overview...... 46 Volvo and the environment...... 12 Seat belts...... 18 Instrument panel...... 49 Important warnings...... 13 Supplemental Restraint System...... 21 Indicator and warning symbols...... 51 Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)...... 26 Symbols – instrument panel...... 53 Side impact protection ...... 29 Information display...... 56 Door Mounted Inflatable Curtain system 12-volt sockets...... 58 (DMIC) ...... 30 Lighting panel...... 59 Roll-over Protection system (ROPS) ...... 31 Left-side steering wheel lever...... 61 Crash mode...... 32 Trip computer...... 63 Child safety...... 33 Cruise control*...... 65 Child restraint systems...... 35 Right-side steering wheel lever...... 67 Infant seats...... 37 Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warn- seats...... 39 ing flashers...... 69 Booster cushions...... 41 Parking brake...... 70 00 ISOFIX 01lower anchors...... 42 Power02 windows...... 71 Child restraint registration and recalls...... 43 Mirrors...... 72 Personal settings...... 75 HomeLink® Wireless Control System*..... 77

Information Provided by:Provided Information

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Contents

03 Climate 04 Interior 05 Locks and alarm General information...... 82 Front seats...... 92 Remote key and key blade...... 118 Air vents...... 84 Power retractable hard top ...... 100 Valet locking ...... 122 Electronic Climate Control ...... 85 Interior lighting...... 106 Keyless drive*...... 124 Air distribution...... 88 Storage compartments...... 108 Locking and unlocking...... 128 03 Trunk04 ...... 113 Alarm*05...... 130

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5 Contents

06 Starting and driving 07 Wheels and tires 08 Car care General information...... 136 General information...... 172 Washing and cleaning the car...... 200 Fuel requirements...... 139 Tire inflation...... 175 Paint touch up...... 204 Ignition switch...... 142 Inflation pressure—U.S. models ...... 177 Starting the vehicle...... 143 Inflation pressure—Canadian models .... 178 Starting the vehicle with keyless drive*... 145 Tire designations...... 179 Manual , 6-speed*...... 146 Glossary of tire terminology...... 181 Automatic transmission*...... 147 Vehicle loading...... 182 Shiftlock override...... 149 Uniform tire quality gradings...... 184 Brake system...... 150 Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires.. 185 Stability system...... 152 Temporary spare...... 186 Towing...... 154 Wheel nuts...... 187 Jump starting...... 157 Changing a wheel...... 188 Towing a trailer...... 158 Tire Sealing System ...... 190 Detachable06 trailer hitch...... 160 Tire Pressure07 Monitoring System (TPMS) 195 08 Transporting loads...... 161 Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*... 162 Park assist*...... 166

Information Provided by:Provided Information

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Contents

09 Maintenance and servicing 10 Audio 11 Specifications Volvo maintenance...... 208 Audio functions...... 238 Label information...... 264 Maintaining your car...... 210 Radio functions...... 243 Dimensions and weights...... 266 Hood...... 212 CD player/CD changer...... 251 Fuel, oils, and fluids...... 269 Engine compartment...... 213 Audio menu...... 255 Engine oil...... 271 Engine oil...... 214 Bluetooth® hands-free connection...... 256 Engine specifications...... 272 Fluids...... 216 Electrical system...... 274 Wiper blades...... 218 Three-way catalytic converter...... 276 Battery...... 219 Volvo programs...... 277 Replacing bulbs...... 221 Fuses09...... 228 10 11

Information Provided by:Provided Information 7 Contents

12 Index Index...... 12 278

Information Provided by:Provided Information 8 Contents

Information Provided by:Provided Information 9 Introduction

General information

About this manual Contact your Volvo retailer for additional infor- WARNING • Before you operate your vehicle for the first mation. time, please familiarize yourself with the CALIFORNIA proposition 65 new-engine oil consumption information, NOTE Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, see page 214. You should also be familiar and certain vehicle components contain or with the information found in the chapters • All information, illustrations and specifi- emit chemicals known to the state of Cali- "Instruments and controls", and "Starting cations contained in this manual are fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or and driving". based on the latest product information other reproductive harm. In addition, certain available at the time of publication. fluids contained in vehicles and certain • Information contained in the balance of the products of component wear contain or Volvo reserves the right to make model manual is extremely useful and should be • emit chemicals known to the State of Cali- read after operating the vehicle for the first changes at any time, or to change spec- fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or time. ifications or design without notice and other reproductive harm. without incurring obligation. • The manual is structured so that it can be • Do not export your Volvo to another used for reference. For this reason, it WARNING should be kept in the vehicle for ready country before investigating that coun- access. try's applicable safety and emission Certain components of this vehicle such as control requirements. In some cases it air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, Options and accessories may be difficult or impossible to comply adaptive steering columns, and button cell Optional or accessory equipment described in with these requirements. Modifications batteries may contain Perchlorate material. this manual is indicated by an asterisk. to the emission control system(s) may Special handling may apply for service or render your Volvo not certifiable for vehicle end of life disposal. Optional or accessory equipment may not be legal operation in the U.S., Canada and See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ available in all countries or markets. Please other countries. perchlorate. note that some vehicles may be equipped dif- ferently, depending on special legal require- ments. WARNING Shiftlock (automatic transmission) When your car is parked, the gear selector is If your vehicle is involved in an accident, Optional or accessory equipment may not be locked in the Park (P) position. To release the available in all countries or markets. Please unseen damage may affect its driveability and safety. selector from this position, turn the ignition key note that some vehicles may be equipped dif- to position II (or start the engine), depress the ferently, depending on special legal require- brake pedal, press the button on the front side ments. of the gear selector and move the selector from Park (P).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 10 Introduction

General information

Keylock (automatic transmission) When the ignition is switched off, the gear selector must be in the Park (P) position before the key can be removed from the ignition switch.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) The ABS system in your car performs a self- diagnostic test when the vehicle first reaches the speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several times and a sound may be audible from the ABS control module. This is normal.

Fuel filler door Press the button on the light switch panel when the car is at a standstill to open the fuel filler door.

Fuel filler cap After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turn- ing it clockwise until it clicks into place. If this cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is run- ning when the car is refueled, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine" light) may indicate a fault.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 11 Introduction

Volvo and the environment

Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus- is the next critical step in completing the life cator) light illuminates, or stays on after the tomers. As a natural part of this commitment, cycle. The metal content is about 75% of the vehicle has started. we care about the environment in which we all total weight of a vehicle, which makes the vehi- • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related live. Caring for the environment means an cle among the most recycled industrial prod- waste such as used motor oil, used batter- everyday involvement in reducing our environ- ucts. In order to have efficient and well-con- ies, brake pads, etc. mental impact. Volvo's environmental activities trolled recycling, dismantling information is • When cleaning your vehicle, please use are based on a holistic view, which means we available for all Volvo models. For Volvo, all genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo consider the overall environmental impact of a homogeneous plastic parts weighing more car care products are formulated to be product throughout its complete life cycle. In than 3.4 oz. (100 grams) are marked with inter- environmentally friendly. this context, design, production, product use, national symbols that indicate how the com- For additional information regarding the envi- and recycling are all important considerations. ponent is to be sorted for recycling. In addition ronmental activities in which Volvo Cars of In production, Volvo has partly or completely to continuous environmental refinement of North America, LLC and Volvo Car Corporation phased out several chemicals including CFCs, conventional gasoline-powered internal com- are involved, visit our Internet home page at: lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and bustion engines, Volvo is actively looking at http://www.volvocars.us. reduced the number of chemicals used in our advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles. plants 50% since 1991. When you drive a Volvo, you become our part- Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into ner in the work to lessen the car's impact on production a three-way catalytic converter with the environment. To reduce your vehicle's a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen environmental impact, you can: sensor, in 1976. The current version of this • Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. highly efficient system reduces emissions of Tests have shown decreased fuel econ- harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the omy with improperly inflated tires. exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and the search to eliminate the remaining emis- • Follow the recommended maintenance schedule in your Warranty and Service sions continues. Volvo is the only automobile Records Information booklet. manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for the air conditioning system of all models as far • Drive at a constant speed whenever pos- back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec- sible. tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are • See a trained and qualified Volvo service bringing us closer to our goal. After Volvo vehi- technician as soon as possible for inspec- cles and parts have fulfilled their use, recycling tion if the check engine (malfunction indi-

Information Provided by:Provided Information 12 Introduction

Important warnings

Accessory Installation Information booklet for more warranty cellular telephone use by a driver while the • We strongly recommend that Volvo owners information. Volvo assumes no responsi- vehicle is moving. install only genuine, Volvo-approved bility for death, injury, or expenses that • If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga- accessories, and that accessory installa- may result from the installation of nonge- tion system, set and make changes to your tions be performed only by a trained and nuine accessories. travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked. qualified Volvo service technician. • Never program your audio system while • Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to Driver distraction the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre- ensure compatibility with the performance, • Driver distraction results from driver activ- sets with the vehicle parked, and use your safety, and emission systems in your vehi- ities that are not directly related to control- programmed presets to make radio use cle. Additionally, a trained and qualified ling the vehicle in the driving environment. quicker and simpler. Volvo service technician knows where Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped • Never use portable computers or personal accessories may and may not be safely with many feature-rich entertainment and digital assistants while the vehicle is mov- installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please communication systems. These include ing. consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv- hands-free cellular telephones, navigation ice technician before installing any acces- systems, and multipurpose audio systems. A driver has a responsibility to do everything sory in or on your vehicle. You may also own other portable elec- possible to ensure his or her own safety and the safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth- Accessories that have not been approved tronic devices for your own convenience. • ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions by Volvo may or may not be specifically When used properly and safely, they enrich is part of that responsibility. tested for compatibility with your vehicle. the driving experience. Improperly used, Additionally, an inexperienced installer any of these could cause a distraction. may not be familiar with some of your vehi- • For all of these systems, we want to pro- cle's systems. vide the following warning that reflects the • Any of your vehicle's performance and strong Volvo concern for your safety: safety systems could be adversely affec- • Never use these devices or any feature of ted if you install accessories that Volvo has your vehicle in a way that distracts you not tested, or if you allow accessories to be from the task of driving safely. Distraction installed by someone unfamiliar with your can lead to a serious accident. In addition vehicle. to this general warning, we offer the fol- • Damage caused by unapproved or lowing guidance regarding specific newer improperly installed accessories may not features that may be found in your vehicle: be covered by your new vehicle warranty. • Never use a hand-held cellular telephone See your Warranty and Service Records while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit

Information Provided by:Provided Information 13 14 ...... 43 Child restraintregistrationand recalls...... 42 ISOFIX loweranchors...... 41 Booster cushions...... 39 Convertible seats...... 37 Infant seats...... 35 Child restraintsystems...... 33 Child safety...... 32 Crash mode...... 31 Roll-over Protectionsystem(ROPS)...... 30 Door MountedInflatableCurtainsystem(DMIC)...... 29 Side impactprotectionairbags...... 26 Occupant WeightSensor(OWS)...... 21 Supplemental RestraintSystem...... 18 Seat belts...... 16 Occupant safety...... I nf or mat i on Pr ov i ded by :

G020871 SAFETY 01

Information Provided by:Provided Information 01 Safety

01 Occupant safety

Volvo's concern for safety • Never drink and drive. However, NHTSA cannot become Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern • If you are taking any medication, consult involved in individual problems dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled your physician about its potential effects between you, your retailer, or Volvo on your driving abilities. off the production line. Three-point seat belts Cars of North America, LLC. To con- (a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy- • Take a driver-retraining course. absorbing impact zones were designed into tact NHTSA, you may either call the • Have your eyes checked regularly. Volvo cars long before it was fashionable or Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at required by government regulation. • Keep your windshield and headlights 1-888-327-4236 clean. We will not compromise our commitment to Replace wiper blades when they start to (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: safety. We continue to seek out new safety • leave streaks. features and to refine those already in our cars. NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans- You can help. We would appreciate hearing • Take into account the traffic, road, and portation, Washington D.C. 20590. weather conditions, particularly with your suggestions about improving automobile You can also obtain other information safety. We also want to know if you ever have regard to stopping distance. a safety concern with your car. Call us in the about motor vehicle safety from: U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: Reporting safety defects in the U.S. http://www.safercar.gov 1-800-663-8255. If you believe that your vehicle has a Volvo strongly recommends that if defect which could cause a crash or Occupant safety reminders your vehicle is covered under a serv- could cause injury or death, you ice campaign, safety or emission How safely you drive doesn't depend on how should immediately inform the old you are but rather on: recall or similar action, it should be National Highway Traffic Safety completed as soon as possible. • How well you see. Administration (NHTSA) in addition to Please check with your local retailer • Your ability to concentrate. notifying Volvo Cars of North Amer- or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC • How quickly you make decisions under ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar stress to avoid an accident. if your vehicle is covered under these complaints, it may open an investiga- conditions. The following suggestions are intended to help tion, and if it finds that a safety defect you cope with the ever changing traffic envi- NHTSA can be reached at: ronment. exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. Internet:

Information Provided by:Provided Information 16 01 Safety

Occupant safety 01 http://www.nhtsa.gov Telephone: 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).

Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans- port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. To contact Transport Canada, call (800) 333-0510, or (613) 993-9851 if you are calling from the Ottawa region.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 17 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

Using seat belts tain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts • Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled also include a tension reducing device which, up into its retractor and that the shoulder in the event of a collision, limits the peak forces and lap belts are taut. exerted by the seat belt on the occupant. Unbuckling the seat belt Buckling a seat belt • To remove the seat belt, press the red sec- Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch tion on the seat belt receptacle. Before plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is exiting the vehicle, check that the seat belt heard. The seat belt retractor is normally retracts fully after being unbuckled. If nec- "unlocked" and you can move freely, provided essary, guide the belt back into the retrac- that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far. tor slot.

NOTE WARNING The seat belt is easiest to reach by grasping Never use a seat belt for more than one

G020104 it near the lower seat belt guide, not over the occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion shoulder. of the belt under the arm, behind the back Adjusting the seat belt or otherwise out of position. Such use could cause injury in the event of an accident. As Seat belts should always be worn by all occu- The retractor will lock up as follows: seat belts lose much of their strength when pants of your vehicle. Children should be prop- exposed to violent stretching, they should erly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster • if the belt is pulled out rapidly be replaced after any collision, even if they seat determined by age, weight and height. • during braking and acceleration appear to be undamaged. Volvo also believes no child should sit in the • if the vehicle is leaning excessively front seat of a vehicle. • when driving in turns Most states and provinces make it mandatory When wearing the seat belt remember: for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts. • The belt should not be twisted or turned. Seat belt pretensioners • The lap section of the belt must be posi- All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners tioned low on the hips (not pressing against that reduce slack in the belts. These preten- the abdomen). sioners are triggered in situations where the front or side impact airbags deploy, and in cer-

Information Provided by:Provided Information 18 01 Safety

Seat belts 01

WARNING Seat belt guides Seat belt use during pregnancy • Never repair the belt yourself; have this work done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. • Any device used to induce slack into the shoulder belt portion of the three-point belt system will have a detrimental effect on the amount of protection avail- able to you in the event of a collision. • The seat back should not be tilted too far back. The shoulder belt must be taut in order to function properly. • Do not use child safety seats or child

booster cushions/backrests in the front G020106 G020105 passenger's seat. We also recommend Seat belt guides (on both front seats) that children who have outgrown these The seat belt should always be worn during devices sit in the rear seat with the seat These guides are designed to help provide pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the belt properly fastened. easier access to the seat belts. A belt can be correct way. The diagonal section should wrap taken out of the guide and slid to the rearmost over the shoulder then be routed between the part of the lower seat belt anchorage rod to breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap make it easier for passengers to enter or exit section should lay flat over the thighs and as the rear seat. low as possible under the belly. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack from the belt and insure that it fits close to the body without any twists. As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 19 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

steering wheel). Within this context, they seat belts. The audible signal and warning light Seat belt maintenance should strive to position the seat with as large will be on for a total of 6 seconds from the time Check periodically that the seat belts are in a distance as possible between their belly and the ignition is switched on, regardless of good condition. Use water and a mild deter- the steering wheel. whether or not the seat belts are fastened. gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull Child seats vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and rapidly on the strap. Please refer to page 35 for information on warning light will be active for a total of 6 sec- securing child seats with the seat belts. onds. Rear seats Seat belt reminder The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two additional functions: • It provides information about which seat belts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes- sage will appear in the information display when a belt is being used. This message will disappear after approximately 6 sec- onds or can be erased by pressing the READ button on the left steering wheel lever. • It also provides a reminder if one of the occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. A visual and audible signal will be G029652 given. These signals will stop when the Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console seat belt has been re-buckled or can be stopped by pressing the READ button. The seat belt reminder consists of an audible signal, an indicator light near the rearview mir- The message in the information display can ror and a symbol in the instrument panel that always be accessed, even if it has been erased, alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their by pressing the READ button to display stored messages.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 20 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System 01

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Where applicable, a text message will also be WARNING displayed when the SRS warning light illumi- nates. If this warning symbol is not functioning If your vehicle has been subjected to flood properly, the general warning symbol illumi- conditions (e.g. soaked carpeting/standing water on the floor of the vehicle) or if your nates and either SRS SERVICE vehicle has become flood-damaged in any URGENT or SRS AIRBAG SERVICE way, do not attempt to start the vehicle or REQUIRED will be displayed. put the key in the ignition before discon- necting the battery (see below). This may WARNING cause airbag deployment which could result in personal injury. Have the vehicle towed to • If the SRS warning light stays on after a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- the engine has started or if it illuminates nician for repairs. while you are driving, have the vehicle Automatic transmission inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as Before attempting to tow the vehicle, use G026330 possible. the following procedure to override the shiftlock system to move the gear selector SRS warning light • Never try to repair any component or to the neutral position: part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer- As an enhancement to the three-point seat 1. Switch off the ignition for at least ence in the system could cause mal- belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple- 10 minutes and disconnect the battery. function and serious injury. All work on mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS these systems should be performed by 2. Wait at least one minute. consists of seat belt pretensioners, front air- a trained and qualified Volvo service bags, side impact airbags, the occupant 3. Insert the key in the ignition and turn it technician. weight sensor, and door-mounted inflatable to position II. curtains. All of these systems are monitored by 4. Press firmly on the brake pedal. the SRS control module. An SRS warning light 5. Move the gear selector from Park (P) to in the instrument panel (see the illustration) illu- the Neutral (N) position, see page 149, minates when the ignition key is turned to posi- for information on manually overriding tion I, II, or III, and will normally go out after the shiftlock system. approximately 7 seconds if no faults are detected in the system.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 21 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System

The front airbag system • The driver's side front airbag is folded and located in the steering wheel hub. • The passenger's side front airbag is folded behind a panel located above the glove compartment. G020111 G015167

The front airbags supplement the three-point Location of the passenger's side front airbag seat belts. For these airbags to provide the As the movement of the seats' occupants com- protection intended, seat belts must be worn presses the airbags, some of the gas is expel- at all times. led at a controlled rate to provide better cush- The front airbag system includes gas genera- ioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera- deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire tion sensors that activate the gas generators, process, including inflation and deflation of the causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a sec- gas. ond. The location of the front airbags is indicated by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel pad and above the glove compartment, and by decals on both sun visors and on the front and far right side of the dash.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 22 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System 01

WARNING Front airbag deployment NOTE The front airbags are designed to deploy The airbags in the vehicle are designed • Deployment of front airbags occurs only • during certain frontal or front-angular col- • to be a SUPPLEMENT to-not a replace- one time during an accident. In a colli- lisions, impacts, or decelerations, depend- ment for-the three-point seat belts. For sion where deployment occurs, the air- ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and maximum protection, wear seat belts at bags and seat belt pretensioners acti- object impacted. The airbags may also all times. Be aware that no system can vate. Some noise occurs and a small deploy in certain non-frontal collisions prevent all possible injuries that may amount of powder is released. The where rapid deceleration occurs. occur in an accident. release of the powder may appear as The SRS sensors, which trigger the front Never drive a vehicle with a steering • smoke-like matter. This is a normal • airbags, are designed to react to both the wheel-mounted airbag with your hands characteristic and does not indicate fire. impact of the collision and the inertial on the steering wheel pad/airbag hous- Volvo's front airbags use special sen- forces generated by it, and to determine if • ing. sors that are integrated with the front the intensity of the collision is sufficient for seat buckles. The point at which the air- • The front airbags are designed to help the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags bag deploys is determined by whether prevent serious injury. Deployment to be deployed. occurs very quickly and with consider- or not the seat belt is being used, as well However, not all frontal collisions activate the able force. During normal deployment as the severity of the collision. front airbags. and depending on variables such as • Collisions can occur where only one of seating position, one may experience • If the collision involves a nonrigid object the airbags deploys. If the impact is less abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other (e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed severe, but severe enough to present a injuries as a result from deployment of object at a low speed, the front airbags will clear injury risk, the airbags are trig- one or both of the airbags. not necessarily deploy. gered at partial capacity. If the impact is • When installing any accessory equip- • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a more severe, the airbags are triggered ment, make sure that the front airbag side impact collision, in a collision from the at full capacity. system is not damaged. Any interfer- rear or in a rollover situation. ence in the system could cause mal- • The amount of damage to the bodywork Should you have questions about any compo- function. does not reliably indicate if the airbags nent in the SRS system, please contact a should have deployed or not. trained and qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo Customer Support: In the USA Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 23 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System

Customer Care Center WARNING 1 Volvo Drive • Do not use child safety seats or child P.O. Box 914 booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches 1-800-458-1552 (140 cm) in height who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the www.volvocars.us seat belt fastened1. In Canada • Never drive with the airbags deployed. Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. The fact that they hang out can impair the steering of your vehicle. Other National Customer Service safety systems can also be damaged.

175 Gordon Baker Road • The smoke and dust formed when the G032243 airbags are deployed can cause skin North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 Airbag decal in the front passenger's door opening and eye irritation in the event of pro- 1-800-663-8255 longed exposure. www.volvocanada.com

1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 26.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 24 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System 01

WARNING WARNING • Children must never be allowed in the • No objects or accessory equipment, front passenger's seat. Volvo recom- e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed mends that ALL occupants (adults and on, attached to, or installed near the air children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches bag hatch (the area above the glove (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of compartment) or the area affected by any vehicle with a passenger-side front airbag deployment. airbag. See page 34 for guidelines. • There should be no loose articles, e.g. • Occupants in the front passenger's seat coffee cups, on the floor, seat, or dash- must never sit on the edge of the seat, board area. sit leaning toward the instrument panel • Never try to open the airbag cover on or otherwise sit out of position. the steering wheel or the passenger's

G032525 • The occupant's back must be as upright side dashboard. This should only be as comfort allows and be against the done by a trained and qualified Volvo Airbag decal on passenger's side dashboard seat back with the seat belt properly service technician. fastened. • Failure to follow these instructions can • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on result in injury to the vehicle occupants. the dash, seat or out of the window. G032934

Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors

Information Provided by:Provided Information 25 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)

Disabling the passenger's side front not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF airbag under certain conditions. indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on to remind you that the passenger's side front The OWS works with sensors that are part of airbag is disabled. The the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp is located in the overhead sensors are designed to detect the presence of OFF console, near the base of the rearview mirror. a properly seated occupant and determine if the passenger's side front airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not NOTE inflate). When the ignition is switched on, the OWS The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas- indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds while the system performs a self-diagnostic senger's side front airbag when: test. • the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in the front However, if a fault is detected in the system: seat,

G018346 The OWS indicator light will stay on • the system determines that an infant is • The SRS warning light (see page 21) will Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light present in a rear-facing infant seat that is • installed according to the manufacturer's come on and stay on Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults instructions, The message PASS. AIRBAG OFF SERVICE and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches the system determines that a small child is URGENT will be displayed in the information (140 cm) be seated in the rear seat of any vehi- • present in a forward-facing child restraint display. cle with a passenger's side front airbag, and be that is installed according to the manufac- properly restrained. Children should always be turer's instructions, seated in child restraints appropriate for their size and weight. See also the child safety rec- • the system determines that a small child is ommendations on page 33. present in a booster seat, • a front passenger takes his/her weight off The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is of the seat for a period of time, designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard • a child or a small person occupies the front (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will passenger's seat.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 26 01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) 01

WARNING passenger's side front airbag is disabled (see sitting properly in the front passenger's seat. the following table). The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator If a fault in the system is detected and indi- lamp will be off and remain off. cated as explained on the preceding page, be aware that the passenger's side front air- Passenger's OWS indica- Passenger's If a person of adult size is sitting in the front bag will not deploy in the event of a collision. seat occu- tor light sta- side front passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER In this case, the SRS system and Occupant pancy status tus airbag sta- AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible Weight Sensor should be inspected by a tus that the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. trained and qualified Volvo service techni- If this happens: cian as soon as possible. Seat unoc- OWS indica- Passenger's cupied tor light side front 1. Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to lights airbag disa- place the seatback in an upright position. WARNING bled up 2. Have the person sit upright in the seat, • Never try to open, remove, or repair any centered on the seat cushion, with the per- Seat occu- OWS indica- Passenger's components in the OWS system. This son's legs comfortably extended. could result in system malfunction. pied by low tor light side front Maintenance or repairs should only be weight lights airbag disa- 3. Restart the vehicle and have the person carried out by an a trained and qualified occupant/ up bled remain in this position for about two Volvo service technician. objectA minutes. This will allow the system to • The front passenger's seat should not detect that person and enable the pas- Seat occu- OWS indica- Passenger's be modified in any way. This could senger's frontal airbag. pied by tor light side front reduce pressure on the seat cushion, 4. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator heavy occu- is not airbag ena- which might interfere with the OWS sys- lamp remains on even after this, the person pant/object lit bled tem's function. should be advised to ride in the rear seat. A Volvo recommends that children always be properly This condition reflects limitations of the OWS The OWS is designed to disable (will not inflate) restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled classification capability. It does not indicate the passenger's side front airbag when a rear unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is OWS malfunction. facing infant seat, a forward-facing child any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front air- restraint, or a booster seat is detected. The bag, move the child restraint to the rear seat. Modifications PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) If you are considering modifying your vehicle in illuminate and stay on to remind you that the the passenger's side front airbag anytime the any way to accommodate a disability, for system senses that a person of adult size is example by altering or adapting the driver's or

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 27 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)

front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys- WARNING WARNING tems, please contact Volvo at: • No objects that add to the total weight Keep the following points in mind with In the USA on the seat should be placed on the respect to the OWS system. Failure to follow Volvo Cars of North America, LLC front passenger's seat. If a child is these instructions could adversely affect the seated in the front passenger's seat system's function and result in serious injury Customer Care Center with any additional weight, this extra to the occupant of the front passenger's seat: 1 Volvo Drive weight could cause the OWS system to enable the airbag, which might cause it • The full weight of the front seat passen- P.O. Box 914 to deploy in the event of a collision, ger should always be on the seat cush- Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 thereby injuring the child. ion. The passenger should never lift The seat belt should never be wrapped him/herself off the seat cushion using 1-800-458-1552 • around an object on the front passeng- the armrest in the door or the center In Canada er's seat. This could interfere with the console, by pressing the feet on the OWS system's function. floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. cushion, or by pressing against the • The front passenger's seat belt should National Customer Service backrest in a way that reduces pressure never be used in a way that exerts more on the seat cushion. This could cause 175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario pressure on the passenger than normal. OWS to disable the passenger's side M2H 2N7 This could increase the pressure exer- front airbag. ted on the weight sensor by a child, and 1-800-663-8255 could result in the airbag being enabled, • Do not place any type of object on the which might cause it to deploy in the front passenger's seat in such a way event of a collision, thereby injuring the that jamming, pressing, or squeezing child. occurs between the object and the front seat, other than as a direct result of the correct use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (ALR/ELR) seat belt, see page 34. • No objects should be placed under the front passenger's seat. This could inter- fere with the OWS system's function.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 28 01 Safety

Side impact protection airbags 01

Side impact airbags – front seats only WARNING • The SIPS airbag system is a supple- ment to the structural Side Impact Pro- tection System and the three-point seat belt system. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the car or in rollover situations. • The use of seat covers on the front seats may impede SIPS airbag deployment. • No objects, accessory equipment or stickers may be placed on, attached to or installed near the SIPS airbag system

G025315 or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment. G020118 SIPS airbag deployment • Never try to open or repair any compo- Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbag NOTE nents of the SIPS airbag system. This As an enhancement to the structural side should be done only by a trained and impact protection built into your car, the car is SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs qualified Volvo service technician. also equipped with Side Impact Protection only on the side of the vehicle affected by • In order for the SIPS airbag to provide System (SIPS) airbags. the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations. its best protection, both front seat The SIPS airbag system is designed to help occupants should sit in an upright posi- increase occupant protection in the event of tion with the seat belt properly fastened. Components in the SIPS airbag system certain side impact collisions. The SIPS air- • Failure to follow these instructions can This SIPS airbag system consists of gas gen- bags are designed to deploy only during cer- result in injury to the occupants of the erators and side airbag modules built into the tain side-impact collisions, depending on the vehicle in the event of an accident. outboard sides of both front seat backrests. crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 29 01 Safety

01 Door Mounted Inflatable Curtain system (DMIC)

WARNING • The DMIC system is a supplement to the Side Impact Protection System. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle. It only provides protection for the occu- pants of the front seats. • There is a risk of injury if the driver or front seat passenger leans on or against the door panel when the DMIC deploys. • Never install or mount any equipment on the insides of the doors, door pillars,

G025425 or side panels. This could impede the G025424 function of the DMIC system. The DMIC is a supplement to the structural side • Never try to open or repair any compo- impact protection. These inflatable curtains are nents of the DMIC system. This should WARNING concealed in the upper section of both doors. be done only by a trained and qualified In order for the DMIC to provide its best The Inflatable Curtain (DMIC) and the Side Volvo service technician. protection, both front seat occupants • should sit in an upright position with the seat Impact Airbag System (SIPS airbag) will belt properly fastened; adults using the seat both deploy in certain side impacts. belt and children using the proper child • DMIC deployment can occur regardless of restraint system. Only adults should sit in whether the power retractable hard top is the front seats. Children must never be up or down. allowed in the front passenger seat. See page 34 for guidelines. Failure to follow • If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains these instructions can result in injury to the inflated for approximately 5 seconds. vehicle occupants in an accident.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 30 01 Safety

Roll-over Protection system (ROPS) 01

Introduction NOTE If ROPS has deployed, the system should be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING • The rear seat of the Volvo C70 is intended for two occupants, and only two rear seat belts are provided. The center section of the seat should never be used to seat a passenger. • No objects should be placed over the roll bars or behind the rear seat head G020797 restraints. Deployed ROPS roll bars • All repairs or maintenance to the ROPS The ROPS system consists of two roll bars system should only be performed by a located behind the rear seat head restraints, trained and qualified Volvo service tech- and a sensor that monitors the roll or pitch nician. angle of the vehicle. If the vehicle rolls or pitches beyond a preset angle, or in the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient force, the roll bars are automatically deployed (raised). The ROPS system is designed to function regardless of whether the power retractable hard top is up or down. By design, the tops of the roll bars are equipped with a point in order to pierce the rear window if the top is up.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 31 01 Safety

01 Crash mode

Driving after a collision fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety sys- 3. Try to start the vehicle. tems, the brake system, etc. Moving the vehicle WARNING If the electrical system is able to reset system status to normal (CRASH MODE SEE • Never attempt to repair the vehicle MANUAL will no longer be displayed), the yourself or to reset the electrical system vehicle may be moved carefully from its pres- after the vehicle has displayed CRASH ent position, if for example, it is blocking traffic. MODE SEE MANUAL. This could It should, however, not be moved farther than result in injury or improper system func- is absolutely necessary. tion. • Restoring the vehicle to normal operat- WARNING ing mode should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable nician. after CRASH MODE has been set, it should G026363 not be driven or towed (pulled by another • After CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL vehicle). There may be concealed damage If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, has been displayed, if you detect the that could make it difficult or impossible to control. The vehicle should be transported the text CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may odor of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel leakage, do not attempt to start the on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and quali- appear in the information display. This indi- vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately. fied Volvo service technician for inspection/ cates that the vehicle's functionality has been repairs. reduced. Attempting to start the vehicle This text can only be shown if the display is If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is undamaged and the vehicle's electrical system no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the is intact. vehicle. To do so: CRASH MODE is a feature that is triggered if 1. Remove the ignition key or optional keyless one or more of the safety systems (for example, drive start control, see page 145. front or side airbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or more of the seat belt pretensioners) has 2. Reinsert the key or start control in the igni- deployed. The collision may have damaged an tion switch. The vehicle will then attempt to important function in the vehicle, such as the reset CRASH MODE to normal mode.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 32 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Children should be seated safely restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring When a child has outgrown the child safety Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint or increasing the injury of a child. seat, you should use the rear seat with the standard seat belt fastened. The best way to systems for all occupants including children. All states and provinces have legislation gov- help protect the child here is to place the child Remember that, regardless of age and size, a erning how and where children should be car- on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly child should always be properly restrained in a ried in a car. Find out the regulations existing located on the hips (see the illustration on page car. in your state or province. Recent accident sta- 41). Legislation in your state or province may tistics have shown that children are safer in rear Your car is also equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in seating positions than front seating positions attachments, which make it more convenient combination with the seat belt, depending on when properly restrained. A child restraint sys- to install child seats. the child's age and/or size. Please check local tem can help protect a child in a vehicle. Here's regulations. Some restraint systems for children are what to look for when selecting a child restraint designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap system: A specially designed and tested booster cush- belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. ion can be obtained from your Volvo retailer. Such child restraint systems can help protect • It should have a label certifying that it children in cars in the event of an accident only meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle USA: for children weighing 33–80 lbs. (15– if they are used properly. However, children Safety Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Can- 36 kg) and 38–54 inches (97–137 cm) in height ada, CMVSS 213. could be endangered in a crash if the child Canada: for children weighing 40–80 lbs. (18– restraints are not properly secured in the vehi- • Make sure the child restraint system is 36 kg) and 40–54 inches (102–137 cm) in height cle. Failure to follow the installation instructions approved for the child's height, weight and development – the label required by the for your child restraint can result in your child WARNING striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop. standard or regulation, or instructions for infant restraints, typically provide this infor- Do not use child safety seats or child Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable mation. booster cushions/backrests in the front substitute for a child restraint system. In an • In using any child restraint system, we urge passenger's seat. We also recommend that accident, a child held in a person's arms can children under 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) in you to carefully look over the instructions be crushed between the vehicle's interior and height who have outgrown these devices sit that are provided with the restraint. Be sure in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened. an unrestrained person. The child could also be you understand them and can use the injured by striking the interior, or by being ejec- device properly and safely in this vehicle. ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver A misused child restraint system can result or impact. The same can also happen if the in increased injuries for both the infant or infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat. child and other occupants in the vehicle. Other occupants should also be properly

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 33 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Automatic Locking Retractor/ WARNING Volvo recommends that you do not dis- Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ connect the airbag system in your vehicle. ELR) Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front • Volvo strongly recommends that everyone To make child seat installation easier, each passenger's seat. We also recommend that in the vehicle be properly restrained. seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip- children who have outgrown these devices • Volvo recommends that ALL occupants ped with a locking mechanism to help keep the sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet seat belt taut. fastened. 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a front passenger When attaching the seat belt to a child Volvo's recommendations side airbag. seat: Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit • Drive safely! 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really. according to the child seat manufacturer's A front airbag is a very powerful device instructions. designed, by law, to help protect an adult. 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. Because of the size of the airbag and its speed 3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the of inflation, a child should never be placed in buckle (lock) in the usual way. the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel- ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around has been an innovator in safety for over sev- the child seat. enty-five years, and we'll continue to do our A sound from the seat belt retractor will be part. But we need your help. Please remember audible at this time and is normal. The belt will to put your children in the back seat, and now be locked in place. This function is auto- buckle them up. matically disabled when the seat belt is unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. Volvo has some very specific recommendations: • Always wear your seat belt. • Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety device which, when used with a three- point seat belt can help reduce serious injuries during certain types of accidents.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 34 01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

Child restraints G026518 G026513

Convertible seat Booster cushion

G008170 Infant seat WARNING WARNING There are three main types of child restraint A child seat should never be used in the Always refer to the child restraint manufac- systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and front passenger seat of any vehicle with a turer's instructions for detailed information booster cushions. They are classified accord- front passenger airbag – not even if the on securing the restraint. ing to the child's age and size. Passenger airbag off symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles The following section provides general infor- equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If mation on securing a child restraint using a the severity of an accident were to cause the three-point seat belt. Refer to page 42 for airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious information on securing a child restraint using injury or death to a child seated in this posi- ISOFIX lower anchors. tion.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 35 01 Safety

01 Child restraint systems

WARNING • When not in use, keep the child restraint system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to help pre- vent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision. • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recom- mends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that chil- dren should ride rearward facing, prop- erly restrained, as long as possible. • The following text is mandated by Canadian legislation: The Volvo C70 is not equipped with top tether anchors. Child restraints or booster cushions requiring anchors of this kind cannot be properly fastened and should not be used in this vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 36 01 Safety

Infant seats 01

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt WARNING • An infant seat must be in the rear-facing position only. • The infant seat should not be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe installation.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the vehicle. G026523

G026417 Fasten the seat belt Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng- er's seat WARNING A child seat should never be used in the NOTE front passenger seat of any vehicle with a Refer to page 42 for information on secur- front passenger airbag – not even if the ing a child restraint using ISOFIX lower "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the anchors. rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the G026526 airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat injury or death to a child seated in this posi- tion. 2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat according to the manufacturer's instruc- tions. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 37 01 Safety

01 Infant seats

and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. G026512

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt G026516 out as far as possible to activate the belt's Ensure that the seat is securely in place automatic locking function. WARNING NOTE It should not be possible to move the child The locking retractor will automatically restraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any release when the seat belt is unbuckled and direction. allowed to retract fully. 6. Push and pull the infant seat to ensure that 5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the it is held securely in place by the seat belt. seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound 7. The infant seat can be removed by unbuck- from the seat belt retractor's automatic ling the seat belt and letting it retract com- locking function will be audible at this time pletely.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 38 01 Safety

Convertible seats 01

Securing a convertible seat with a seat WARNING WARNING belt Always use a convertible seat that is suita- A small child's head represents a consider- ble for the child's age and size. See the con- able part of its total weight and its neck is vertible seat manufacturer's recommenda- still very weak. Volvo recommends that chil- tions. dren up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recom- mends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as pos- sible.

WARNING • Convertible child seats should be instal- led in the rear seat only. • A rear-facing convertible seat should not

G026420 be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas- installation. senger's seat

NOTE G026518 1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of the vehicle. Refer to page 42 for information on secur- Route the seat belt through the convertible seat ing a child restraint using ISOFIX lower anchors.

Convertible seats can be used in either a for- ward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 39 01 Safety

01 Convertible seats

NOTE WARNING The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child release when the seat belt is unbuckled and restraint more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any allowed to retract fully. direction.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, The convertible seat can be removed by let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract sound from the seat belt retractor's auto- completely. matic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. G026514

Fasten the seat belt 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat according to the manufacturer's instruc- tions. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible. G026524 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt's Ensure that the seat is securely in place automatic locking function. G026537

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt 6. Push and pull the convertible seat to ensure that it is held securely in place by the seat belt.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 40 01 Safety

Booster cushions 01

Securing a booster cushion Booster cushions are recommended for chil- dren who have outgrown convertible seats. 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat of the vehicle. 2. With the child properly seated on the booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the cushion according to the man- ufacturer's instructions. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible. 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and fits snugly around the child. G026517

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion WARNING and fasten the seat belt • The hip section of the three-point seat WARNING belt must fit snugly across the child's hips, not across the stomach. A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a • The shoulder section of the three-point front passenger airbag – not even if the seat belt should be positioned across Passenger airbag off symbol near the the chest and shoulder. rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles • The shoulder belt must never be placed equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If behind the child's back or under the the severity of an accident were to cause the arm. airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this posi- tion.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 41 01 Safety

01 ISOFIX lower anchors

Using the ISOFIX lower child seat 3. Fasten the attachment on the child anchors restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX lower anchors. 4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instruc- tions.

NOTE • Always follow your child seat manufac- turer's installation instructions and use ISOFIX lower anchors whenever possi- ble. G031682

WARNING Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX G020798 lower anchors • Child seats should never be placed in Lower anchors for ISOFIX-equipped child the center of the rear seat. This area is WARNING seats are located in both rear seating positions, not intended to be a seating position Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly hidden below the backrest cushions. Symbols and is not equipped with a seat belt or ISOFIX anchors. to the anchor (see the illustration). If the on the seat back upholstery mark the anchor attachment is not correctly fastened, the positions (see the illustration). child restraint may not be properly secured in the event of a collision. To access the anchors: 1. Put the child restraint in position. 2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 42 01 Safety

Child restraint registration and recalls 01

Registering a child restraint Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons. You must register your child restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay informed about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return the registration card that comes with new child restraints. Child restraint recall information is readily avail- able in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. Govern- ment's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393. In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 43 44 *

Option/accessory, for more information, seeIntroduction...... 77 HomeLink® WirelessControl System*...... 75 Personal settings...... 72 Mirrors...... 71 Power windows...... 70 Parking brake...... 69 Steering wheeladjustment,Hazardwarningflashers...... 67 Right-side steeringwheellever...... 65 Cruise control*...... 63 Trip computer...... 61 Left-side steeringwheellever...... 59 Lighting panel...... 12-volt sockets...... 56 Information display...... 53 Symbols –instrumentpanel...... 51 Indicator andwarningsymbols...... 49 Instrument panel...... 46 Instrument overview...... I nf or mat i on Pr ov i ded by : ...... 58 ......

G020901 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 02

Information Provided by:Provided Information 02 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

20 02 18 22 17 21 16 19

10 11 12 13 14 15 8 26 8 23 24 25 9 8 9 8 7 7 27 6 28 5 29 4 3 3 31 2 30

1 32

33

34 G028206

Information Provided by:Provided Information 46 02 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

Steering wheel adjustment Seat belt reminder and Occupant Parking brake Weight Sensor indicator 02 Hood opener Position for optional equipment Driver's side reading light Controls in front doors Position for optional equipment Movement detector*, alarm sensor Left steering wheel lever Courtesy lighting switch Lighting panel, fuel filler door opener Position for accessory switch Door open handle and locking button Passenger's side reading light Lock indicator light Display for climate control, personal Climate system air vent settings, and audio system

Side window air vent Controls for personal settings and audio system Cruise control Controls for climate system Horn, airbag Hazard warning flashers Main instrument panel Door open handle, and locking button Audio controls Glove compartment Right steering wheel lever Gear selector Ignition switch 12-volt socket Rear-view mirror Switch for raising/lowering the power retractable hard top

 Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 47 02 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

Control panel in driver's door

02 G032088

Power windows

Door mirror button, driver's side

Door mirror adjustment control

Door mirror button, passenger's side

Information Provided by:Provided Information 48 02 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel

Instrument panel

1 432 5 67 02

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 G031465

Speedometer the temperature readings may be slightly sively high engines speeds. This will be higher than the actual ambient tempera- noticeable as a pronounced unevenness in Turn signal, left ture. engine speed. Warning symbol – See the following pages Information symbol – See the following Indicator and information symbols for additional information. pages for additional information. Fuel gauge, see page 269 for fuel tank vol- Information display – The display presents Turn signal, right ume. When a warning light in the gauge information and warning messages, the Tachometer – Shows engine speed in comes on, the vehicle should be refueled ambient temperature, clock, etc. When the as soon as possible, see page 63 for ambient temperature is between 23 °F and thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not drive continuously with the needle more information on fuel level and con- 36 °F (–5 °C and +2 °C), a snowflake sym- sumption in the "Trip computer” section. bol is shown in the display. This symbol in the red area of the dial, which indicates serves as a warning for possible slippery maximum allowable engine rpm range. High beam indicator road surfaces. Please note that this symbol Instead, shift to a higher gear or slow the vehicle down. The engine management Function display – This window displays does not indicate a fault with your car. At information on functions such as the low speeds, or when the car is not moving, system will automatically prevent exces-  Information Provided by:Provided Information 49 02 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel

odometer, trip odometers, optional rain sensor, and cruise control. 02 Trip odometer reset button – The trip odometers are used to measure short dis- tances. Press the button briefly to switch between the odometer for the car's total mileage and the two trip odometers, T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 seconds) resets the currently selected trip odometer. Temperature gauge – The gauge indicates the temperature of the engine cooling sys- tem. If the temperature is abnormally high and the needle enters the red zone, a mes- sage is shown in the display. Bear in mind that auxiliary lamps in front of the air intake reduce the cooling capacity at high outside temperatures and high engine loads. Indicator and warning symbols

Information Provided by:Provided Information 50 02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

Function check Symbols in the center of the instrument If the red warning symbol lights up: The indicator and warning symbols1 light up panel 1. Stop the car as soon as possible in a suit- 02 when you turn the ignition key or the optional able location. keyless drive start control to the driving posi- 2. Read the message in the information dis- tion (position II) before starting. This shows that play. the symbols are functioning. 3. Follow the instructions provided, or con- When the engine starts, all sym- tact a trained and qualified Volvo service bols go out. If the engine is not technician. Erase the message by pressing started within 5 seconds, all of the , see page 56. symbols except the malfunction READ indicator light (CHECK ENGINE) Information symbol and the oil pressure warning light The yellow information symbol will go out. Certain symbols may lights up to alert the driver to a not have their functions illustrated, depending message in the information dis- on the car's equipment. G026365 play. This symbol illuminates when The PARK BRAKE symbol will not go out until the vehicle is traveling at speeds below 5 mph (7 km/h). the parking brake has been released. Warning symbol The red warning symbol lights up The message can be erased by pressing the to indicate a fault that could affect READ button, see page 56, or will disappear the car's drivability.This symbol automatically (the length of time required for illuminates when the vehicle is the message to disappear varies, depending traveling at speeds above 5 mph on the function indicated). (7 km/h). A text explaining the nature of the fault When the message "TIME FOR REGULAR will also be shown in the information display. SERVICE" is displayed, the text can be erased The symbol and accompanying text will remain and the information symbol light can be turned on until the fault has been corrected. This sym- off by pressing the READ button. The text will bol may also light up in combination with other disappear and the symbol light will go out auto- indicator or warning symbols. matically after two minutes.

1 On certain engines, the symbol for low oilpressure is not used. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see page 214.  Information Provided by:Provided Information 51 02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

This symbol may also light up in combination with other indicator or warning symbols. 02 NOTE The car can still be driven after the informa- tion symbol has come on. The car can be driven for 1–2 weeks after service-related information has been displayed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 52 02 Instruments and controls

Symbols – instrument panel

Symbols – left side A CHECK ENGINE light may have many cau- 3. Rear fog light ses. Sometimes, you may not notice a change This symbol indicates that the rear in your car's behavior. Even so, an uncorrected fog light (located in the driver's 02 condition could hurt fuel economy, emission side taillight cluster) is on. controls, and drivability. Extended driving with- out correcting the cause could even damage other components in your car. 4. Stability system DSTC This indicator symbol flashes when NOTE the DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Canadian models are equipped with the Traction control system) is actively second symbol. working to stabilize the car, see page 152 for more detailed infor- mation. 2. Anti-lock Brake system (ABS)

G026439 If the warning light comes on, there 5. Tire Pressure Monitoring System is a malfunction of the ABS system This system monitors inflation (the standard braking system will pressure in the tires. See page 1. Malfunction indicator light still function). 195 for more information. The vehicle should be driven to a trained and qualified Volvo service As you drive, a computer called technician for inspection, see 6. Fuel level warning light On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) page 150 for additional informa- When this light comes on, the vehi- monitors your car's engine, trans- tion. cle should be refueled as soon as mission, electrical and emission possible. systems. NOTE The CHECK ENGINE light will light up if the Canadian models are equipped with the computer senses a condition that potentially second symbol. may need correcting. When this happens, please have your car checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 53 02 Instruments and controls

Symbols – instrument panel

Symbols – right side 2. Parking brake applied 4. Oil pressure warning light1 This light is on when the parking If the light comes on while driving, 02 brake (hand brake) is applied. The the car, stop the engine immedi- parking brake lever is situated ately, and check the engine oil between the front seats, see level. If the oil level is normal and page 70 for more information. the light stays on after restart, have the car towed to the nearest trained and quali- fied Volvo service technician. After hard driv- ing, the light may come on occasionally when the engine is idling. This is normal, provided it goes off when the engine speed is increased. NOTE 5. Seat belt reminder Canadian models are equipped with the second symbol. This symbol (and the seat belt

G026438 reminder light above the rear view mirror) will light up if either front 3. SRS system warning light seat occupant has not buckled his/ 1. Turn signal indicator for trailer (certain If this light comes on while the car her seat belt. If the car is not mov- markets only) is being driven, or remains on for ing, the symbols will go out after approximately If you are towing a trailer, this light longer than approximately 10 sec- 6 seconds. will flash simultaneously with the onds after the car has been turn signals on the trailer. If the started, the SRS system's diag- 6. Generator warning light light does not flash when signaling, nostic functions have detected a fault in a seat If the light comes on while the one of the turn signals on the trailer belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side engine is running, have the charg- or on the car are not functioning properly. impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain. ing system checked by an author- Have the system(s) inspected by a trained and ized Volvo workshop. qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.

1 On certain engines, this symbol is not used to indicate low oil pressure. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see also page 214.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 54 02 Instruments and controls

Symbols – instrument panel

7. Brake failure warning light 2. Restart the engine. If this light comes on while driving 3. If both warning lights go off, no further 02 or braking, stop the car as quickly action is required and the car can be as possible in a safe place, open driven. the hood, and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir, see 4. If both lights remain on after the engine has page 213 for the location of the been restarted, switch off the engine again reservoir. and check the brake fluid level, see page 213 for the location of the reservoir.

Door open warning NOTE The driver will be alerted if one of the doors, the Canadian models are equipped with the hood or the trunk are open or ajar. second symbol. At low speeds If the car is moving at a speed of WARNING less than approximately 3 mph If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the (5 km/h), the Information symbol in reservoir or if a Brake failure – Service the instrument panel will light up urgent message is displayed in the infor- and a message will be shown in the mation display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the information display indicating which door(s), car towed to a trained and qualified Volvo etc is not completely closed. service technician and have the brake sys- tem inspected. At higher speeds If the car is moving at a speed If the BRAKES and ABS warning lights come above approximately 6 mph on at the same time, this could indicate a fault (10 km/h), the Warning symbol in in the brake system. the instrument panel will light up and a message will be shown in the In this case: information display indicating which door(s), 1. Stop the car in a suitable place and switch etc is not completely closed. off the engine.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 55 02 Instruments and controls

Information display

Messages NOTE Message Meaning 02 If a message is displayed when e.g. you are SERVICE Take your car to a using the trip computer, this message must A be read before you can access the trip com- REQUIRED trained and qualified puter. Volvo service techni- cian for inspection as soon as possible (but Message Meaning preferably before the next scheduled mainte- A STOP SAFELY Stop the vehicle in a nance service). safe place and switch off the engine to help BOOK TIME Book time for service at prevent the risk of seri- FOR SERVICE an authorized Volvo ous damage. workshop.

G019617 HIGH ENGINE Stop the vehicle in a TIME FOR This message is affec- TEMP STOP safe place and switch REGULAR ted by the number of When an indicator or warning light in the instru- SAFELY off the engine to help MAINTE- miles/km driven, by the ment panel comes on, a message is also prevent the risk of seri- NANCE number of months, or shown in the information display. To read a ous damage. by the number of engine message: hours since the service SERVICE Take your car to a 1. Press the READ button (1). reminder was reset at URGENTA trained and qualified the most recent regu- 2. Pressing READ repeatedly enables you to Volvo service techni- larly scheduled service. scroll to any other messages that may be cian for inspection stored. immediately. MAINTE- If the vehicle is not serv- NANCE OVER- iced according to A SEE MANUAL Refer to your owner's DUE schedule, the warranty manual. For additional may not apply to dam- information, please aged parts, etc. contact your Volvo retailer.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 56 02 Instruments and controls

Information display

Message Meaning TIME FOR This message is affec- 02 REGULAR ted by the number of MAINTE- miles/km driven, by the NANCE number of months, or by the number of engine hours since the service reminder was reset at the most recent regu- larly scheduled service.

REMINDER Stop as soon as possi- CHECK OIL ble and switch off the LEVEL engine, check the oil level and top up if nec- essary, see page 214.

A This is part of the message. Additional information will also be displayed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 57 02 Instruments and controls

12-volt sockets

12-volt socket (front seat) NOTE 02 The cover should be kept on when the aux- iliary socket is not in use. G026349

12-volt socket, auxiliary equipment The 12-volt socket can be used to plug in cer- tain accessories such as cellular telephones, etc. The maximum current is 10 A. The key must be in position I (or higher) for the auxiliary socket to function.

Ashtrays/cigarette lighter The auxiliary socket can also be used for a cig- arette lighter1, and ashtrays, which can be pur- chased from your Volvo retailer.

1 Accessory.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 58 02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

Parking lights Pos. Lighting Headlights 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. All lighting off. Low beam head- 02 lights (daytime running lights) 2. The low beam headlights (daytime running will automatically come on if the lights) illuminate automatically, except ignition key is in position II. when the light switch (1) is in the parking 1 Front and rear parking lights light position . and license plate lights will also be on. High beams can be NOTE briefly flashed. The headlights See page 61 for information on switching switch off automatically when between high and low beams. the ignition key is removed.

Parking lights Brake lights

G026415 The brake lights come on automatically when Daytime running lights. High the brakes are applied. Light switch beams and high beam flash can be used in this position. Thumb wheel for adjusting brightness of Fog lights instrument lighting Front fog lights* Daytime running lights The front and rear parking lights can be turned on even when the ignition is switched off. The front fog lights can be used in combination with either the headlights or the parking lights. To unlock the fuel filler door Turn switch (1) to the parking light position. 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. Rear fog light The license plate lights also illuminate when the parking lights are switched on. 2. Press button (3) to turn on the front fog lights. An indicator light in the button illuminates when the front fog lights are on.

1 On Canadian models, the daytime running lights will remain on with the light switch in this position.  Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 59 02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

Rear fog light NOTE Manually unlocking the fuel filler door The single rear fog light is located in the driver's 02 side taillight cluster. To make it easier to read the odometer, trip odometer, clock, and ambient temperature, The rear fog light will only function in combi- these gauges illuminate when the vehicle is nation with the high/low beam headlights or the unlocked and when the key has been optional front fog lights. removed from the ignition switch. The light- ing will go out when the vehicle is locked. 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. 2. Press button (5) to turn on the rear fog light. Move the thumb wheel (2) up to increase An indicator light in the button illuminates when brightness or down to decrease brightness. the rear fog light is on. Unlocking the fuel filler door NOTE With the ignition switched off, press button (4)

The rear fog light is considerably brighter to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that G020951 than the normal taillights and should be the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the used only when conditions such as fog, rain, car begins to move forward. If it should be necessary to manually unlock the snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler fuel filler door from the trunk, the power retract- other vehicles to less than 500 ft. able hard top should be up. (150 meters). door re-locks. 1. Remove the panel covering the taillight housing on the right side of the trunk. Instrument panel lighting 2. Pull the cord that is attached to a hook to The instrument panel lighting illuminates when pop open the fuel filler door. the ignition is in position II and the light When the fuel filler door has opened, return the switch (1) is in either position or . cord to the hook and replace the taillight cover panel.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 60 02 Instruments and controls

Left-side steering wheel lever

Lever positions Turn signals High/low beam headlights

When turning Continuous high beams 02 Move the lever as far up or down as pos- 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. sible (to position 2) to start the turn signals. 2. With the light switch (1) in position , The turn signals will be cancelled automatically see page 59, pull the turn signal lever by the movement of the steering wheel, or the toward the steering wheel (position 4) to lever can be returned to its initial position by toggle between high and low beams. hand. High beam flash When changing lanes 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. The driver can automatically flash the turn sig- nals 3 times by: 2. Pull the turn signal lever to position 3. The high beams will remain on until the lever is • Moving the turn signal lever up or down to released. G026954 position 1 and releasing it. Turn signals, lane change position • Moving the lever up or down to position 2 Home safe lighting and immediately back to its original posi- When you leave your car at night, you can Turn signals, position for normal turns tion. make use of the home safe lighting function to illuminate the area in front of the car. High beam flash NOTE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Toggle between high and low beams, • This automatic flashing sequence can Home Safe lighting 2. Pull the direction indicator lever as far as be interrupted by immediately moving possible towards the steering wheel (to the lever in the opposite direction. position 4) and release it. • If the turn signal indicator flashes faster than normal, check for a burned-out 3. Exit the car and lock the doors. turn signal bulb. The headlights and parking lights will illuminate and remain on for 301, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval can be changed according to your

1 Factory setting.  Information Provided by:Provided Information 61 02 Instruments and controls

Left-side steering wheel lever

preferences by using the Personal Settings function, see page 75 for more information. 02

Information Provided by:Provided Information 62 02 Instruments and controls

Trip computer

• ACTUAL SPEED (current speed in mph, MILES TO EMPTY TANK Canadian models only) This function shows the approximate distance 02 • DSTC, see page 152 that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the tank. The calculation is based on average fuel NOTE consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in Warning messages from the car's monitor- the tank when the reading was taken. ing systems will override the trip computer function. When the message ---- miles to empty tank appears in the display, refuel as soon as pos- If a warning message is shown in the informa- sible. tion display while you are using the trip com- AVERAGE puter: This value indicates fuel consumption since the

G029052 last time the trip computer was reset, by press- 1. Acknowledge the message by pressing the ing RESET (button 3). When the engine is READ (button 1). READ (press to acknowledge/confirm/ switched off, information on fuel consumption erase a message) 2. Press READ again to return to the trip is stored and remains in system memory until Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip computer function. RESET (button 3) is pressed again. computer menus) INSTANTANEOUS RESET Controls This value indicates the current fuel consump- The trip computer functions can be accessed The trip computer stores information gathered tion, based on readings taken once per sec- by twisting the thumb wheel (2) one step at a from several systems in your car and has four ond. When the car is not moving, "----" will be time in either direction. Twisting a final time menus (five on Canadian models) that can be displayed. returns you to the original function. shown in the information display. AVERAGE SPEED • MILES TO EMPTY TANK Resetting This value indicates average speed since the last time the trip computer was reset, by press- • AVERAGE (average fuel consumption) AVERAGE (average fuel consumption) and AVERAGE SPEED can be reset. ing RESET (button 3). When the engine is • INSTANTANEOUS (current fuel con- switched off, information on average speed is sumption) 1. Select one of these functions. stored and remains in system memory until the • AVERAGE SPEED 2. Press RESET (3). RESET (button 3) is pressed again.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 63 02 Instruments and controls

Trip computer

ACTUAL SPEED (Canadian models only) This function provides the driver with an instan- 02 taneous conversion of the car's current speed from km/h to mph.

NOTE Trip computer readings may vary slightly depending on the circumference of the tires on the car, tire inflation, or driving style.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 64 02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

Engaging the cruise control function Increasing or decreasing speed NOTE • Cruise control will not function at 02 speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h). • Momentary acceleration, for less than 1 minute (e.g. when passing another car), does not affect cruise control oper- ation. The car will automatically return to the previously set speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Temporarily disengaging the cruise control

G020141 G031667 • Press 0 to temporarily disengage cruise control. The cruise control buttons are located on the Use + or – in the following ways to increase or CRUISE will appear in the function display. left side of the steering wheel hub. decrease the vehicle's speed: The currently set speed is stored in the sys- tem's memory. 1. Press and hold down + or – until the vehicle NOTE reaches the desired speed. This will This does not set the vehicle's speed. become the set speed when the button is Cruise control is also automatically released. disengaged: If the speed drops below approximately 1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE will 2. Press + or – for approximately a half sec- • 20 mph (30 km/h) when driving uphill. appear in the function display in the center ond and release the button to increase or of the instrument panel. decrease vehicle speed by approximately • When the brake or clutch pedal is 1 mph (1.6 km/h). depressed. 2. Press + or – to set the current speed. If the gear selector is moved to posi- CRUISE ON will be displayed. • tion N.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65 02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

• During wheel spin or wheel lock-up. If the vehicle's speed is increased by using 02 • the accelerator pedal for more than 1 minute.

Returning to the set speed Press the button to resume the previously set speed. CRUISE ON will be displayed.

Disengaging cruise control Cruise control can also be disengaged by: • Pressing the CRUISE button (CRUISE ON will no longer be shown in the function display). • Putting the gear selector in Neutral (N).

WARNING Cruise control should not be used in heavy traffic or when driving on wet or slippery roads. Cruise control may not maintain set speed on steep downgrades.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

66 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Right-side steering wheel lever

Windshield wipers Manual wiper function CAUTION From position 0, move the lever upward. The windshield wipers will • Use ample washer fluid when washing 02 sweep one stroke at a time for as the windshield. The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are B C long as the lever is held up. in operation. 0 • Before using the wipers, ice and snow A Intermittent wiper function 0 With the lever in this position, you should be removed from the wind- shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper can set the wiper interval by mov- blades are not frozen in place. ing the thumb wheel (C) upward to increase wiper speed or down- ward to decrease the speed. Headlight washers (certain models) Continuous wiper function When the lever has been pulled, high pressure jets mounted in the bumper will spray the head- G025419 The wipers operate at "normal" speed. lights. Windshield/headlight washers High speed wiper function. The following applies to conserve washer fluid, Rain sensor – on/of, see page 67 see page 59 for information on the light switch positions: Thumb wheel – Windshield washers Low/high beam headlights on Windshield wipers off Pull the lever toward the steering wheel and The headlights will be washed the first time the The windshield wipers are off when release it. The wipers will make 2–3 sweeps windshield is washed. Thereafter, the head- the lever is in position 0. across the windshield after the lever has been lights will only be washed once for every five released. times the windshield is washed within a 10 minute period.

Parking lights on Optional Dual Xenon headlights will be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed. Normal halogen headlights will not be washed.  Information Provided by:Provided Information 67 02 Instruments and controls

Right-side steering wheel lever

– Rain sensor* 3. Press button B (see page 67). The rain sen- – Thumb wheel sor symbol will appear in the lower display. The thumb wheel is used to set the wiper inter- 02 Manual deactivation val when intermittent wiping is selected, or the sensitivity to the amount of rain on the wind- The rain sensor can be deactivated by: shield when the rain sensor is selected. Move Pressing button (B). the wheel upward or downward to increase/ or decrease wiper speed when the intermittent function is selected, or to increase/decrease Moving the windshield wiper lever down. the optional rain sensor's sensitivity when the this function is activated. NOTE The rain sensor function will remain acti- vated if the lever is briefly moved up to acti- vate the "manual sweep" function. G031469

The rain sensor regulates windshield wiper CAUTION speed according to the amount of water on the The rain sensor should be deactivated when windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor is washing the car in an automatic car wash, adjusted by moving the thumb wheel (C in the etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the illustration on the previous page) up (the wipers wipers will start inadvertently in the car will sweep the windshield more frequently) or wash and could be damaged. down (the wipers will sweep the windshield less frequently). Automatic deactivation The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in On/Off the following situations: Activating the rain sensor • When the key is removed from the ignition. 1. Switch on the ignition. • Five minutes after the ignition is switched 2. Put the windshield wiper lever in posi- off if the key is left in the ignition. tion 0.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warning flashers

Steering wheel adjustment Check that the steering wheel is locked in the 2. Press the button again to turn off the flash- new position. ers. 02 WARNING NOTE Never adjust the steering wheel while driv- • Regulations regarding the use of the ing. hazard warning flasher may vary, depending on where you live. • The hazard warning flashers will be acti- Hazard warning flashers vated automatically if an airbag deploys. G027308

Both the height and the reach of the steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable posi- tion for the driver. 1. Pull down the lever on the steering column to release the steering wheel. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to a suitable G020144 position. 3. Press the lever back into place to lock the The four-way flasher should be used to indi- steering wheel in the new position. If nec- cate that the vehicle has become a traffic haz- essary, press the steering wheel slightly ard. while pressing the lever into the locked 1. Press the triangular button in the center position. dash.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 69 02 Instruments and controls

Parking brake

Parking brake (hand brake) 4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake lever must be pulled more firmly. 02 5. When parking a vehicle always put the gear selector in first gear (for manual transmis- sion) or P (for automatic transmission). Parking on a hill • If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away from the curb. • If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point toward the curb.

G026348 Releasing the parking brake 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. The parking brake lever is located between the 2. Pull the lever up slightly, press the button front seats. at the end of the lever and lower the lever completely. NOTE The indicator light will illuminate even if the WARNING parking brake has only been partially Pull up the parking brake lever up firmly to applied. its full extent.

When applying the parking brake 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. 2. Pull the parking brake lever up firmly to its full extent. 3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that the vehicle is at a standstill.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 70 02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

Operation Opening a window to close a window to the position of your Lightly press down the front edge of any of the choice. 02 buttons (A or B) to the first detent ("stop") to 2. Pull up the front part of one or both buttons open a window to the position of your choice. (A) as far as possible and release to auto- matically close the front window(s) com- WARNING pletely. • Always remove the ignition key when the vehicle is unattended. Power window control – front • Never leave children unattended in the passenger's side vehicle. • Make sure that the windows are com- pletely unobstructed before they are operated. G032090

Control panel in driver's door 1. Press down the front part of one or both buttons A as far as possible and release to Open/close front windows automatically open the front window(s) Open/close rear windows completely. The power windows are controlled by buttons 2. To stop the window at any time, pull the in the arm rests. button up. • The ignition must be ON (ignition key in position I, II or the engine running) for the NOTE G019511 power windows to function. To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear windows are opened, also open the front The control for the power window in the front • The power windows will also function after passenger's door operates that window only. the ignition has been switched off as long windows slightly. as neither of the front doors has been opened. Closing a window 1. Lightly pull up the front edge of any of the buttons (A or B) to the first detent ("stop")

Information Provided by:Provided Information 71 02 Instruments and controls

Mirrors

Rearview mirror Rearview mirror with compass* Calibrating the compass

02 G020992 G020991

G008130 The upper right-hand corner of the rearview The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. Auto-dim function mirror has an integrated display that shows the The compass is initially set for the zone to An integrated sensor reacts to headlights from compass direction toward which the car is which the car was delivered, and should following traffic and automatically reduces pointing. Eight different directions can be dis- always be adjusted if the car is driven to a new glare. played: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. The magnetic zone. A "C" will be displayed if cali- display shows your car's orientation with bration becomes necessary. respect to true north. To calibrate the compass: 1. Stop the car in a large, open area, away from traffic. 2. Using a pen or similar object, hold the but- ton (1) depressed for at least 6 sec- onds. "C" will be displayed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Mirrors

Power door mirrors Use this control to adjust the driver's door mirror. 02 Passenger's door mirror: 1. Press the R switch (a light in the switch will go on) to activate the adjustment control. Use this control to adjust the passenger's door mirror. 2. After you have adjusted the mirror(s), press the L or R switch again (the LED will go out) to deactivate the adjustment control.

Storing the mirrors' position

G026409 The position of the door mirrors is stored when

G032110 the vehicle is locked. The next time the driver's Magnetic zones door is unlocked with the same remote key and 3. Press button (1) for at least 3 seconds to The mirror control switches are located on the that door is opened within 2 minutes, the driver's door armrest. display the number of the current magnetic optional power driver's seat and side door mir- zone. rors will automatically move to the position that 4. Press button (1) repeatedly until the num- Adjusting the mirrors they were in when the doors were most ber for the required geographical area (1– recently locked with the same remote key. WARNING 15) is displayed. "C" will be displayed Folding power door mirrors* again. • The mirrors should always be adjusted The mirrors can be folded in for parking/driving 5. Drive slowly in a circle at a maximum speed prior to driving. in narrow spaces. of 6 mph (10 km/h) until a compass direc- • Objects seen in the passenger's side Folding the mirrors in tion is displayed. wide-angle door mirror are closer than they appear to be. 1. Press down the L and R mirror control but- Calibration is complete. tons on the driver's door at the same time.

Driver's door mirror: 2. Release them after approximately one sec- Press the L button (a light in the switch will ond. The mirrors automatically fold in to the go on) to activate the adjustment control. fully retracted position.  Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73 02 Instruments and controls

Mirrors

Folding the mirrors out 1. Fold in the mirrors by pressing the L and Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L R mirror control buttons on the driver's 02 and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors door at the same time. automatically fold out to the fully extended 2. Fold them out again by pressing the L and position. R mirror control buttons. Automatic folding This returns the mirrors to their original (neutral) When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the positions. remote key or with the optional keyless drive system (see page 124), the power door mirrors Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)* with automatically fold in or out. The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an information system that indicates the presence NOTE of another vehicle in the side-view mirror's The door mirrors will not fold out automati- "blind area." See page 162 for detailed infor- cally when the vehicle is unlocked if they mation. were folded in using the buttons on the driv- er's door control panel.

This function can be activated/deactivated in Personal settings (see page 75). In the menu system, go to Car settings Fold mirr. when locking. Return to "neutral" position If a mirror has been inadvertently moved (bum- ped in a parking lot, etc.) from its original (neu- tral) position, it must be moved back to this position before automatic folding will function again. To do so:

Information Provided by:Provided Information

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Personal settings

Control panel Personal settings can be made for some of the 2. Select hour(s) or minute(s) to be changed car's functions, such as the central locking with the left/right arrow keys. system, climate control, and the audio system. 02 3. Press ENTER to start the clock. Please refer to page 239 for more information on the audio functions that can be adjusted. The settings are presented in the display (A). NOTE A If you are currently using the 12-hour time To access the menu and adjust settings setting, use the up/down arrow keys to 1. Press MENU (B). select AM/PM after the minute-setting has been adjusted. 2. Scroll to Car Settings using the menu nav- igation control (E). Lock confirmation light 3. Press ENTER (D). When the car is locked/unlocked with the E B 4. Select an alternative using the menu navi- remote key, the direction indicators can be D C gation control (E). selected to flash to confirm the action. The alternatives On/Off are available for both lock- 5. Confirm your selection by pressing ing and unlocking. ENTER. Autolock To exit the menu When the car starts to move, the doors and Press EXIT (C). trunk can be locked automatically. The alter- G026307 natives On/Off are available. Available settings Display NOTE Clock adjust Menu button To set the time: Pulling the handle twice on a door unlocks and opens that door. Exit button 1. Use the number keys or the up/down arrow Enter button keys on the navigation control (E) to change the hour or minute. Unlock Menu navigation controls There are two alternatives for unlocking:

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 75 02 Instruments and controls

Personal settings

• Global (All doors) – unlocks all doors and Activate once and Ask on exit, see equipped with ECC. Choose between the trunk with one press on the remote key. page 131 for additional information. "Low", "Normal" and "High". 02 • Two Step (Two-stage unlocking) – This • Timer for recirculation – when the timer is alternative unlocks the driver's door with Approach lighting active, the air recirculates in the car for one press on the remote key. A second This alternative determines the length of time 3–12 minutes depending on the ambient press unlocks the passenger's door and for which the car's lights will remain on when temperature. Select On/Off depending on the trunk the Approach light button on the central lock- whether the recirculation timer is to be ing system's remote key is pressed. Intervals active or not. Automatically folding the door mirrors of 30/60/90 seconds may be selected, see the The setting makes it possible to automatically section "Remote key functions" for more infor- Keyless locking and unlocking* fold the door mirrors in or out when the vehicle mation. The following alternatives can be selected for is locked or unlocked. See page 73. locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Home safe lighting Operating side windows This alternative determines the length of time • All doors – all doors are locked or unlocked at the same time. The following alternative can be selected for for which the car's lights will remain on when opening all side windows at the same time by the high beam lever on the steering column is • Doors on the same side – front and rear pressing and holding the Unlock button on the pulled toward the wheel with the ignition doors on the same side are unlocked central locking system’s remote key, (see switched off. Intervals of 30/60/90 seconds together. page 128 for additional information). may be selected, see page 61 for information • Both front doors – both front doors are unlocked together. • Auto open all windows On/Off on using this function. One front door – either of the front doors Information • Temporarily turning off the double can be unlocked separately1. VIN number – The VIN (Vehicle Identifica- locking function and alarm sensor(s) • tion Number) is the car's unique identity Reset to factory settings The double locking function and the alarm sen- number. sors can be temporarily turned off (if, for exam- Use this alternative to return to the default cli- ple, a person or a pet remains in the vehicle • Number of Keys – the number of keys reg- mate system settings. when the doors are locked from outside with istered for the car is displayed here. the remote key, and the power retractable hard Climate functions top is down. There are two alternatives: • Blower speed in AUTO mode – the blower speed can be set to AUTO mode in models

1 Factory default.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

Introduction WARNING Programming HomeLink

• If you use HomeLink to open a garage NOTE 02 door or gate, be sure no one is near the gate or door while it is in motion. Some vehicles may require the ignition When programming a garage door switch to be turned on or to the second • (“accessories”) position for programming opener, it is advised to park outside of and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also rec- the garage. ommended that a new battery be placed in • Do not use HomeLink with any garage the hand-held transmitter of the device door opener that lacks safety stop and being programmed to HomeLink for quicker reverse features as required by U.S. training and accurate transmission of the federal safety standards (this includes radio-frequency signal. any garage door opener model manu- factured before April 1, 1982). A garage 1. Position the end of your hand-held trans- door that cannot detect an object - sig- G030070 mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the naling the door to stop and reverse - HomeLink button you wish to program does not meet current U.S. federal The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro- while keeping the indicator light in view. safety standards. For more information, vides a convenient way to replace up to three contact HomeLink at: 2. Simultaneously press and hold both the hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters www.homelink.com. chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit- used to activate devices such as gate opera- ter buttons until the HomeLink indicator tors, garage door openers, entry door locks, light changes from a slow to a rapidly blink- Retain the original transmitter of the RF device security systems, even home lighting. Addi- ing light. Now you may release both the you are programming for use in other vehicles tional HomeLink information can be found on HomeLink and hand-held transmitter but- as well as for future HomeLink programming. It the Internet at www.homelink.com. tons. is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink Buttons”.

1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.  Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77 02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

NOTE found where the hanging antenna wire is cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink” attached to the motor-head unit. step 2 with the following: 02 Some devices may require you to replace this Programming Step 2 with procedures 5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or • Continue to press and hold the HomeLink noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro- “smart” button. (The name and color of the button while you press and release - gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica- button may vary by manufacturer.) There every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand- tor light does not change to a rapidly blink- are 30 seconds to initiate step 6. held transmitter until the HomeLink indica- ing light after performing these steps, con- tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com. 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold blinking light. Now you may release both for two seconds and release the pro- the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the 3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and buttons. “press/hold/release” sequence a second release the programmed HomeLink but- Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com- time, and, depending on the brand of the ton up to two separate times to activate the plete. garage door opener (or other rolling code door. If the door does not activate, press equipped device), repeat this sequence a and hold the just-trained HomeLink button third time to complete the programming Using HomeLink and observe the indicator light. process. To operate, simply press and release the pro- • If the indicator light stays on con- HomeLink should now activate your rolling grammed HomeLink button. Activation will stantly, programming is complete code equipped device. now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage and your device should activate when door opener, gate operator, security system, the HomeLink button is pressed and Gate Operator/Canadian Programming entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For released. Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans- convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the • If the indicator light blinks rapidly for mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev- device may also be used at any time. In the two seconds and then turns to a con- eral seconds of transmission – which may not event that there are still programming difficul- stant light continue with “Program- be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the ties or questions, contact HomeLink at: ming” steps 4-6 to complete the pro- signal during programming. Similar to this www.homelink.com. gramming of a rolling code equipped Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are device (most commonly a garage door designed to “time-out” in the same manner. opener). If you live in Canada or you are having difficul- 4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor- ties programming a gate operator or garage head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn” door opener by using the “Programming” pro- or “smart” button. This can usually be

Information Provided by:Provided Information

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

Erasing HomeLink Buttons For questions or comments, contact HomeLink To erase programming from the three Home- at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. 02 Link buttons (individual buttons cannot be This device complies with FCC rules part 15 erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation below), follow the step noted: is subject to the following two conditions: (1) 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink This device may not cause harmful interfer- buttons until the indicator light begins to ence, and (2) This device must accept any flash-after 10 seconds. interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired opera- 2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for tion. longer that 20 seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode NOTE and can be programmed at any time beginning The transmitter has been tested and com- with “Programming” - step 1. plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Reprogramming a Single HomeLink the party responsible for compliance could Button void the user’s authority to operate the device.2 To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but- ton. DO NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the Home- Link button, proceed with “Programming” - step 1.

2 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79 80 i itiuin...... 88 Air distribution...... 85 Electronic ClimateControl...... 84 Air vents...... 82 General information...... I nf or mat i on Pr ov i ded by :

G020906 CLIMATE 03

Information Provided by:Provided Information 03 Climate

General information

Air conditioning – A/C Fog on the inside of the windows Passenger compartment filter Your car is equipped with a climate control The defroster function should be used to Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at system that includes either manually adjusta- remove fog or mist from the inside of the win- the recommended intervals. Please refer to ble air conditioning or optional Electronic Cli- dows. Keeping the windows clean with a com- your Warranty and Service Records Informa- mate Control (ECC). mercially available window washing spray will tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified also help prevent fogging or misting Volvo service technician for these intervals. The air conditioning system can be switched 03 The filter should be replaced more often when off, but for optimal air quality in the passenger driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The compartment and to prevent the windows from Climate control maintenance filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should fogging, the air conditioning should be left on Special tools and equipment are required to always be replaced with a new one. – even in cool weather. maintain and carry out repairs on the climate system. Work of this type should only be done NOTE NOTE by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- nician. There are different types of cabin air filters. In warm weather, a small amount of water Ensure that the correct type is installed. may accumulate under the car when it has been parked. This water is condensation Refrigerant from the A/C system and is normal. Volvo cares about the environment. The air Display conditioning system in your car contains a The display above the climate control panel Ice and snow CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance shows the climate settings that have been will not deplete the ozone layer. The system Always keep the air intake grille at the base of made. contains 1.2 lbs (530 g) R134a (HFC 134a), and the windshield free of snow. uses PAG oil. Personal settings There are two functions in the climate system that can be set to your preferences: • Blower speed to Auto mode (models with ECC only). • Timer controlled recirculation of the air in the passenger compartment.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 82 03 Climate

General information

For information about how to make these set- tings, see the Personal settings section on page 75.

03

Information Provided by:Provided Information 83 03 Climate

Air vents

Air vents in the dashboard

03 G019942

Open Closed Horizontal air flow Vertical air flow Direct the outer air vents toward the side win- dows to defrost.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 84 03 Climate

Electronic Climate Control

03 G019518

Auto – On/Off ECC functions 2. Blower speed The blower speed can be Blower speed 1. Auto – On/Off increased or decreased by Recirculation The AUTO function automat- turning the knob. The blower ically regulates climate con- speed is regulated automati- Defroster trol to maintain the desired cally if AUTO is selected. The temperature. The automatic Airflow controls previously set blower speed is function controls heating, air disconnected. A/C – ON/OFF conditioning, blower speed, recirculation, and air distribu- NOTE Heated driver's seat tion. If the knob is turned counterclockwise and Heated front passenger's seat If you select one or more manual functions, the the blower indication in the display goes remaining functions continue to be controlled out, the blower and the air conditioning are Rear window and door mirror defrosters automatically. All manual settings are switched switched off. The display shows the blower Temperature selector off when AUTO is switched on. AUTO symbol and OFF. CLIMATE is shown in the display.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 85 03 Climate

Electronic Climate Control

3. Recirculation 4. Defroster 6. Air conditioning On/Off This function can be used to Directs airflow to the wind- ON: The air conditioning sys- shut out exhaust fumes, shield and side windows and tem is engaged when the ON smoke, etc from the passen- increases blower speed. light is lit and is controlled ger compartment. The air in When the defroster is acti- automatically by the system the passenger compartment vated: to maintain the selected tem- 03 is then recirculated, i.e. no air perature. from outside the car is taken Air flows to the windows at high blower into the car when this function is activated. • OFF: The system is disengaged when the speed. OFF lights up If the air in the car recirculates for too long, • The LED in the defroster button lights up When OFF is selected and the OFF LED is lit, there is a risk of condensation forming on the when this function is activated. The air con- insides of the windows, especially in winter. the air conditioning system is deactivated. ditioning system is controlled to provide Other functions are still controlled automati- maximum air dehumidification. Timer cally. • The air conditioning is automatically The timer function minimizes the risk of fogging When Defroster (4) is selected, the air condi- or stale air when the recirculation function is switched on (can be switched off by press- ing button 6). tioning system is activated for maximum dehu- selected, see page 75 for information on set- midifying. ting the recirculation timer. The air is not recirculated. 7 and 8. Heated front seats* 5. Airflow controls NOTE Maximum heating: Press the Press one of the three buttons button once – both LEDs light Recirculation is always disengaged if the in the illustration to activate up. defroster button is engaged to clear ice or the selected airflow. A symbol condensation from the side windows. in the display above the cli- Reduced heating: Press the mate control panel and a lit button a second time – one LED in the selected button LED lights up. indicate that the manual func- Seat heating off: Press the button a third time tion has been selected. With manually selected – no LEDs are lit. airflow both warm and cool air can be selected. See also the table on page 88.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Climate

Electronic Climate Control

9. Rear window and door mirror 10. Temperature selector Sensors defrosters The temperatures on the driv- • The sunlight sensor is on the upper side of Press to defrost the rear win- er's and passenger's sides the dashboard dow and door mirrors. can be set separately using • The passenger compartment temperature the knob (with the thermome- The rear window and door sensor is located behind the climate sys- ter in it). The temperature can mirrors are defrosted simulta- tem control panel. be set for both sides of the car 03 neously if the switch is • The ambient temperature sensor is in the when the ignition is switched pressed once. The defrost driver's side door mirror. on (both LEDs will be on), which means that a function is active if the LED in the switch is illu- temperature setting will apply to both sides of • The humidity sensor is in the rearview mir- minated. ror. the car. The function can be switched off manually These sensors should never be obstructed. • To set the temperature on one side of the car: by pressing the button. • The defrost function switches off automat- 1. Press the knob once. The LED for one side NOTE of the car will light up. Turn the knob to ically after 12–20 minutes, depending on The sunlight sensor monitors the side of the adjust the temperature. the outside temperature. vehicle from which the sun shines into the 2. Press the knob a second time to set the passenger compartment. This means that NOTE temperature on the opposite side of the the temperature may differ slightly between car. the left and right air vents, even if the climate • On certain markets, the defrost function system temperature is set to be the same may remain on longer than 20 minutes 3. Press the knob a third time to set the tem- for both sides of the passenger compart- in cold weather to help keep the rear perature on both sides of the car at the ment. window free from ice or condensation. same time. • This function is automatically switched Acceleration off when the power retractable hard top NOTE The air conditioning system is temporarily is down. Selecting a temperature that is higher or switched off during full throttle acceleration. lower than necessary will not heat or cool the passenger compartment faster.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 87 03 Climate

Air distribution

Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use: Defroster. Defrost/de-fog the wind- Air to the floor and win- For comfortable condi- shield and front side win- dows. tions and good defrosting Air is not recirculated in dows. in cold weather. this mode. There is also a certain amount of airflow to the Medium to high blower Air conditioning is always 03 dashboard air vents. speed. engaged. There is also a certain amount of airflow to the panel air vents.

Air to windshield and front Prevents fogging in cold Air to the floor and from For sunny weather with side windows. or humid weather (blower the dashboard air vents. cool ambient tempera- speed should be moder- tures. There is also a certain ate to high). amount of airflow to the dashboard air vents.

Air to the windows and For good comfort in Air to the floor. To warm the feet. from the dashboard air warm, dry weather. There is a certain amount vents. of airflow to the dash- board and window air vents.

Airflow directed to the To ensure efficient cooling Airflow to the windows, For cooler air toward the head and chest from the in a warm weather. dashboard air vents, and feet, or for warmer air dashboard air vents. floor. toward the head and chest.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 88 03 Climate

03

Information Provided by:Provided Information 89 90 rn ...... 113 Trunk ...... 108 Storage compartments...... 106 Interior lighting...... 100 Power retractablehardtop...... 92 Front seats...... I nf or mat i on Pr ov i ded by :

G020908 INTERIOR 04

Information Provided by:Provided Information 04 Interior

Front seats

Manual seat adjustment Turn this knob to adjust the backrest tilt. Accessing the rear seat Control panel for the optional power seats.

NOTE Both front seats are equipped with head restraints that can be adjusted vertically to suit the height of the passenger. The upper edge of the head restraint should be at least on a level with the upper-most point of the seat occupant's ear (see the section 04 "Adjusting the front seat head restraints" on page 98).

WARNING Do not adjust the seat while driving. Seat access buttons (power seat shown) The driver's and passenger's seats can be • adjusted in a number of ways to provide a • Adjust the driver’s seat and seat belt Seat adjustment handle (see page 18) before driving. The seat comfortable driving and sitting position. Seat adjustment button should be adjusted so that the brake Forward-rearward: Pull the lever up and pedal can be depressed fully. slide the seat to the position of your choice. • Position the seat as far rearward as Use this control to raise or lower the front comfort and control allow. edge of the seat cushion. Use this control to raise or lower the rear edge of the seat cushion. Turn this knob (optional on some passeng- er's seats) to adjust the firmness of the lumbar support1.

1 Also applies to the optional power seat.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 92 04 Interior

Front seats

Manual seat Moving the seat forward:

04

Pull up the handle. Press the handle down.

Hold the handle up and move it forward Fold the backrest forward until it locks in Remove the seat belt from its guide (see slightly until the backrest begins to move. position. page 19). Move the seat forward.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 93 04 Interior

Front seats

Moving the seat rearward: Power seat Moving the seat forward:

04

Press the handle down.

With the backrest folded forward in the Fold up the backrest to the upright posi- locked position, slide the seat rearward tion. Remove the seat belt from its guide (see until it stops/locks in its original position. page 19). > The seat will return to the position it was Pull up the handle. in before it was moved.

Hold the handle up and move it rearward 6. Return the seat belt to its guide. slightly until the backrest begins to move. Seat position If the seat does not return to its original posi- tion, reset the seat memory function as follows: 1. Sit in the seat. 2. Lift the handle (1) (see page 92) and move the seat as far rearward as possible. 3. While holding the handle up, move the seat forward to the desired position.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 94 04 Interior

Front seats

Moving the seat rearward:

04

Pull up the handle. Press the handle down.

Hold the handle up and move it forward Fold the backrest forward until it locks in 1. With the backrest folded forward in the slightly until the backrest begins to move. position. locked position, press and hold down the button until the seat has returned to its 6. Hold down the button while the seat moves original position. forward. If the seat is in a high position, it will be lowered automatically so that the Pull up the handle. head restraint does not come in contact Hold the handle up and move it rearward with the sun visor. slightly until the backrest begins to move.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 95 04 Interior

Front seats

Power seats* Adjusting the seat The power driver's seat can be adjusted: • If the ignition key is in position I or II. • During a 10 minute period after the doors have been unlocked if the door remains open. • If the door is closed and the ignition key is not yet in the ignition, or if the key is in position 0, the seat can be adjusted or dur- ing a period of 40 seconds. The power 04 passenger's seat can only be adjusted if the ignition key is in position I or II, or if the engine is running. G020199 Press the handle down. NOTE Seat adjustment controls Both front seats are equipped with head Fold up the backrest to the upright posi- Seat adjustment controls 1, 2, 3, and 4 on the tion. restraints that can be adjusted vertically to suit the height of the passenger. The upper side of the seat can be used to move the seat > The seat will return to its original posi- edge of the head restraint should be at least to the position of your choice. tion. on a level with the upper-most point of the Move this section of the control up or down seat occupant's ear (see the section to raise/lower the front section of the seat 6. Return the seat belt to its guide. "Adjusting the front seat head restraints" on cushion. The front passenger's seat belt should be page 98). in its guide while the vehicle is being driven, Move the control forward/rearward to even if the seat is not occupied. move the seat forward or rearward. Move this section of the control up or down WARNING to raise/lower the rear section of the seat cushion. After the seat has been returned to its orig- inal position, be sure that the backrest is Backrest tilt. securely locked in the upright position.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Interior

Front seats

NOTE Programming the seat memory, driver's 3. With the "M" button depressed, press seat only* memory button 1 to store the seat and mir- Both front seats are equipped with head rors' current position. restraints that can be adjusted vertically to suit the height of the passenger. The upper To move the seat and mirrors to the position edge of the head restraint should be at least that they were in when memory button 1 was on a level with the upper-most point of the programmed, press and hold down button 1 seat occupant's ear (see the section until the seat/mirrors stop moving. "Adjusting the front seat head restraints" on page 98). As a safety precaution, the seat will stop auto- matically if the button is released before the seat has reached the preset position. NOTE 04 The power seats have an overload protector Central locking system remote key and that activates if a seat is blocked by any driver's seat memory object. If this occurs, switch off the ignition The remote key transmitter can also be equip- (key in position 0) and wait for approxi- ped with an optional function that controls the G020200 mately 20 seconds before operating the electrically operated driver's seat in the follow- seat again. Power seat memory buttons ing way: Three different seating positions (and the posi- 1. Adjust the seat/door mirrors to the desired Emergency stop tion of the door mirrors) can be stored in the position. If the seat inadvertently begins to move, press seat's memory. The memory buttons are 2. When you leave the car, lock it using the any of the buttons to stop the seat. located on the outboard side of the driver’s remote key. seat (see the illustration). 3. The next time the driver's door is unlocked To program (store) a seat/mirror position in with the same remote key and that door is memory button 1: opened within 2 minutes, the driver's seat 1. Adjust the seat (and door mirrors) to the and door mirrors will automatically move to desired position. the position that they were in when the 2. Press and hold down the "M" (Memory) doors were most recently locked with the button. same remote key.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97 04 Interior

Front seats

NOTE Adjusting the front seat head restraints The head restraints should be put in the upper or lower position according to the height of the The memory function in the remote key occupant of the seat. operates independently the memory func- tion in the seat.

WARNING • Because the driver's seat can be adjusted with the ignition off, children should never be left unattended in the 04 car. • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel. • Do not adjust the seat while driving. The seat should be adjusted so that the The front seat head restraints are designed so brake pedal can be depressed fully. In that they can be adjusted to two different addition, position the seat as far rear- height positions. ward as comfort and control allow. The upper edge of the head restraint should be at least on a level with the upper-most point of The seat rails on the floor must not be • NOTE the seat occupant's ear (see illustration). obstructed in any way when the seat is in motion. • When the vehicle leaves the factory, the To raise or lower a head restraint: front seat head restraints will be in the lower position. Raising or lowering a head restraint • Due to the low roofline of the Volvo C70, 1. Release the head restraint by pressing the it is necessary to have the headrest in button underneath its left side, at the base the lowest position and also to lower the of the support (see the illustration). seat height adjustment if you wish to 2. Move the head restraint until it clicks fold down the seat's backrest. (locks) into the upper or lower position.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 98 04 Interior

Front seats

WARNING WARNING After adjusting the head restraint, be sure • If a front seat head restraint has been that it is securely locked in the new position removed, it must be put properly back by pressing and/or pulling it. in place and it must lock (click) into one of the available adjustment positions Removing a head restraint before the seat is occupied. The front seat head restraints can be removed, • The front seat head restraints must be for example, when cleaning the upholstery or if in position and properly adjusted to the the front passenger's seat backrest is folded height of the person sitting in the seat down to accommodate a long load. To do so: when the vehicle is driven and when the front passenger's seat is occupied. 04 1. Release the head restraint by pressing the release button underneath its left side, at the base of the support. 2. While holding in the release button, press the locking button at the base of the head restraint's right support with a screw driver, etc., and lift the head restraint until it can be removed completely.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 99 04 Interior

Power retractable hard top

Before operating the power retractable CAUTION CAUTION hard top If the power retractable hard top is lowered If the instructions on these pages are not while it is wet, water may drip into the pas- followed, damage to the power retractable senger compartment or trunk hard top's mechanism may occur.

• There should be at least 6.5 feet (2 meters) WARNING of free space from the ground (distance A in the illustration). • The power retractable hard top must not be obstructed in any way when it is There should be at least 8 inches (20 cm) A • being operated. Always have an unob- of free space behind the vehicle (distance structed view of the power retractable 04 B in the illustration in the center column). hard top when it is in motion. See also • The ambient temperature should be above the decal on the trunk divider. 14°F (-10°C). B • Anyone near the vehicle should be well • The trunk divider (see page 101) must be clear of the power retractable hard top's G020800 closed. moving parts before it is operated. • The trunk must be closed. Children must never be allowed to play Please observe the following information • with the power retractable hard top before operating the power retractable hard • The vehicle must be at a standstill and the brake pedal must be pressed. control button. top: Volvo also recommends the following: • Do not leave the power retractable hard • There should be no objects on the power top motionless longer than necessary retractable hard top's cover. • The vehicle should be parked outdoors, on while it is being operated. level ground. • Remove all snow, ice or loose objects from • Do not leave the key in the ignition if the power retractable hard top and trunk • Raising or lowering the power retractable there are children in the vehicle. lid. hard top should preferably be done in one, continuous operation. • The top should be dry before it is lowered. • If the vehicle is parked outdoors, the engine should be idling to help avoid bat- tery drain.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 100 04 Interior

Power retractable hard top

Trunk divider NOTE Power retractable hard top cover If the trunk divider is not completely closed, it will not be possible to operate the power retractable hard top.

04 G020845 G020801

The purpose of the trunk divider is to indicate When lowered, the power retractable hard top the amount of cargo that can be stowed in the is concealed by a cover, see the illustration. trunk without affecting movement of the power G020847 retractable hard top. CAUTION Trunk divider decal 1. Grasp the handle and lift. Do not sit or place heavy objects on the 2. Pull the trunk divider rearward. power retractable hard top cover. 3. Be sure to close the trunk divider com- pletely so that it locks in place on both the right and left sides.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 101 04 Interior

Power retractable hard top

Operating the power retractable hard CAUTION Power retractable hard top-related text top messages Please heed any messages that may • • PRESS BRAKE TO OPERATE TOP appear in the information display while Press the brake pedal to operate the the top is in operation. retractable hard top. Any windows that are closed will be • CLOSE TRUNK TO OPERATE TOP The opened approximately 4 inches (10 cm) • trunk is open and must be closed before while the power retractable hard top is operating the power retractable hard top. in operation. The windows will be auto- matically re-closed when the top is • TRUNK DIVIDER IS NOT CLOSED The completely raised or lowered. trunk divider (see page 101 for more infor- 04 mation) must be closed before operating the power retractable hard top. WARNING • TOP INOPERATIVE LOW BATTERY The • See the section “Before operating the battery's charge is too low to operate the power retractable hard top” on page power retractable hard top. In this case, G032112 100 before operating the power retract- the top can only be raised. Start the engine, Power retractable hard top button able hard top. or if necessary, have the battery charged before operating the top. 1. Turn the ignition key to position II or start Never pull the release wire for the power the engine if the vehicle is parked out- retractable hard top’s hydraulic system that • TOP IS UNLOCKED The power retracta- doors. is located under the rear seat cushion. This ble hard top is not fully up or down. Press/ wire is only intended for use by qualified pull and hold the button again to complete 2. Press the brake pedal. service personnel. Pulling this wire could the operation. lead to: 3. Opening the hard top: Press and hold • TOO HOT OR COLD TO OPERATE down the button. Release the button when • A high risk of being injured by the power TOP The power retractable hard top an audible signal sounds and the message retractable hard top mechanism. mechanism has overheated, or the ambi- TOP FULLY DOWN is displayed. • Unexpected movement of the hard top, ent temperature is below 14° F (-10° C). If or the hard top or the trunk could inad- the mechanism has overheated, wait for Closing the hard top: Pull up and hold the vertently open. approximately 5 minutes (the message in button to raise the hard top. Release the the information display will disappear) and button when an audible signal sounds and • The retractable hard top can be dam- aged. try to lower or raise the top again. the message TOP FULLY UP is displayed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 102 04 Interior

Power retractable hard top

If a fault in the power retractable hard top CAUTION WARNING mechanism occurs, the following messages will be displayed: Carefully read the information under “Before Never pull the release wire for the power operating the power retractable hard top” retractable hard top’s hydraulic system that • TOP MALFUNCTION SERVICE (see page 100) before operating the power is located under the rear seat cushion. This REQUIRED The power retractable hard retractable hard top. Damage may be wire is only intended for use by qualified top cannot be operated. Contact an unavoidable if the power retractable hard service personnel. Pulling this wire could authorized Volvo retailer or service techni- top must be operated under such condi- lead to: tions. cian. If the top is down in this situation, a • High risk of being injured by the power cover for the vehicle is provided in the retractable hard top’s opening/closing trunk. see page 100 for more information. 1. Press or pull the hard top control button mechanism. • TOP MALFUNCTION SEE MANUAL The (see page 102) until ROOF FAILURE SEE • Unexpected movement of the hard top/ 04 power retractable hard top must be oper- MANUAL is displayed. the hard top or the trunk could inadver- ated according to the following instruc- 2. Release the button. tently open. tions. 3. Pull the button again and hold it. After • The retractable hard top can be dam- aged. Emergency operation approximately 5 seconds, the power If the message TOP MALFUNCTION SEE retractable hard top will begin to move. MANUAL is displayed, the power retractable Hold the button up until the top is fully hard top cannot be operated in the normal way. raised.

NOTE NOTE If a fault has occurred and the power retract- Movement of the top may stop briefly. How- able hard top has been raised, it cannot be ever, the button should be pulled up lowered again until the fault has been cor- throughout the entire operation. An audible rected. signal will sound during the entire operation.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 103 04 Interior

Power retractable hard top

Temporary cover 6. Attach the rear side hooks (4) on the edges of the rear wheel housings. 7. Guide the antenna through opening 5. 8. Attach the hooks (6) under the rear bumper.

Wind blocker (retailer installed accessory)

04 G020803

G020802 Location of the cover Covering the vehicle To install the cover: Fold under windshield wipers 1. Raise all windows. Attachment at front wheel housings 2. Take out the cover (stowed in the com- partment in the rear side of the ski hatch in Door mirror opening the center of the rear seat backrest), Attachment at rear wheel housings remove it from the bag and unfold it. G020804 Antenna opening 3. Slide the cover under the windshield wip- ers so that there is one fold under each Wind blocker Attachment at rear bumper wiper blade (1). The wind blocker is intended for use while driv- The cover should only be used if the power 4. Attach the front shock-cord hooks (2) on ing with the power retractable hard top down retractable hard top is down and cannot be the edges of the front wheel housings. to help reduce swirling breezes in the passen- raised. It should be placed over the car so that ger compartment. 5. Slide the openings in the cover (3) over the the shock-cord attaching points are on the respective door mirrors. Installing the wind blocker underside.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 104 04 Interior

Power retractable hard top

1. Unfold the wind blocker to its full width. 2. Unfold the supports on both rear sides. 3. Slide the winder blocker’s rear supports under the rear head restraints so that they rest on the upper edge of the backrest. 4. Press the side lock tabs into the holes in the side panels until they click into place. 5. Raise the wind blocker.

The zipper in the wind blocker can be opened 04 to place or access objects in the rear seat.

CAUTION Slide in the supports carefully to avoid dam- aging the upholstery.

WARNING • Make sure the wind blocker is securely attached. An improperly secured wind blocker may cause injury to occupants of the vehicle or to other motorists. • No one should be allowed to sit in the rear seat when the wind blocker is in place.

When not in use, the wind blocker should be stored in its bag, in the trunk, against the rear seat backrest.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 105 04 Interior

Interior lighting

Interior lighting Neutral position: the interior courtesy light- 5 minutes after the engine has been switched ing comes on when a door is opened, and off. is switched off 10 seconds after the door is closed. Footwell lighting The footwell (and courtesy lighting) comes on Press the right side of the button: the inte- or goes off when one of the side doors is rior courtesy lighting stays off. opened or closed.

Courtesy lighting – automatic function Rear reading lights The interior lighting has a built-in automatic function that switches on the courtesy lighting 04 for 30 seconds when: • the car is unlocked from the outside using the key blade or remote key G020805 • the engine is switched off and the ignition Front courtesy lights and reading lights key is turned to the 0 position. Front driver's side reading light, on/off The courtesy lighting lights up or remains on for 5 minutes when: Courtesy lighting • one of the doors is opened and left open. Front passenger's side reading light, on/off • the courtesy lighting has not been The front seat reading lights can be switched switched off (the right side of button 2 on and off by pressing buttons (1) or (3) when depressed). G020806 the ignition key is position I or II, or when the The automatic lighting goes out when: Rear reading lights engine is running. • the engine is started The rear reading lights can be switched on or The courtesy lighting (2) can be set to three • the car is locked from the outside using the off by pressing the respective buttons, and positions: key blade or remote key. function if the ignition key is in positions I, II, or if the engine is running. Press the left side of the button: the interior If the courtesy lighting is not switched off man- courtesy lighting turns on. ually, it will be turned off automatically The courtesy lighting can be switched on or off within 30 minutes after the engine has been

Information Provided by:Provided Information 106 04 Interior

Interior lighting switched off, or after a door has been opened or closed. These lights switch off automatically 5 minutes after the engine has been switched off.

Vanity mirror

04 G020210

Raise the cover to switch on the light.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 107 04 Interior

Storage compartments

04

Information Provided by:Provided Information 108 04 Interior

Storage compartments

Lockable storage compartment in door Glove compartment Jacket hanger Jacket hanger (intended for light garments only) Storage pocket on front side of front seat cushion Glove compartment Cup holders Storage compartment for e.g., CDs 04 Cup holders for rear seat passengers Storage compartments in rear side panels

Storage compartment on rear side of front G024208 seat backrests. The owners manual and maps can be stored The jacket hanger is located on the inboard WARNING here. There are also holders for coins, pens and side of the front passenger's seat head fuel cards. The glove compartment can only be restraint. It is only intended for hanging light • Anchor any heavy objects to prevent locked and unlocked using the detachable key garments. them from moving during sudden stops. blade from the central locking system's remote • Packages on the rear parcel shelf can key. See page 120 for information on removing obscure vision and may become dan- the key blade from the remote key, and page gerous projectiles in the event of a sud- 129 for information about locking the glove den stop or an accident. compartment.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 109 04 Interior

Storage compartments

Compartment in door panel Rear seat storage compartment Storage under the front, center armrest

04 G030407 G020807 G018371

Open the compartment by lifting the front lower To open, press on the top center of the panel. There are two storage compartments under the section of the lid. Both the forward and rearward catches should front, center armrest. release and the panel should spring open. If • Press the smaller button on the front edge Locking function one side does not open, press again directly The door panel compartments can be locked of the armrest and lift the armrest cover to over that catch. access a shallow storage compartment. by pressing the Lock button on the central locking system’s remote key. • Press the larger button and lift the entire CAUTION armrest to access a deeper compartment. Never pull the panel; the catches may be damaged.

• Press to close and latch the panel.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 110 04 Interior

Storage compartments

CD storage Cup holders in the center console Rear cup holders

04 G026704 G030410 G018372

The deep storage compartment has room for Two cup holders are located under the sliding 10 CD jewel cases. These cases must be cover in the center console. inserted with their spines upward in order to allow space for 10 cases in the storage com- The cup holders can be lifted out if necessary. partment To do so, grasp the indentation on the rear edge of the cup holder and lift. To put the cup holder back in place: 1. Slide the two locating tabs in the front side of the cup holder into the two correspond- ing recesses in the center console storage space. 2. Press down the rear edge of the cup holder. To close the sliding cover, grasp the underside of the front edge and pull.  Information Provided by:Provided Information 111 04 Interior

Storage compartments

Storage compartment behind the parking brake

04 G019624

If the buttons for optional equipment are not installed, the recess behind the parking brake can be used as a storage compartment for coins, etc.

WARNING Objects placed in this compartment should not interfere with the hand brake lever when it is in the lifted (hand brake applied) posi- tion.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 112 04 Interior

Trunk

Loading the trunk NOTE 2. Press the button on the right side of the trunk opening. This movement is part of the normal power retractable hard top operation, which means that messages pertaining to the NOTE power retractable hard top’s operation (see There may be a delay of several seconds page 102) also apply to the this function. before the folded power retractable hard top begins to move. WARNING Movement of the top can be stopped by pressing the button again. Anyone near the vehicle should be well clear of the power retractable hard top's moving 04 parts before it is operated. 3. The folded power retractable hard top will raise slightly. If an audible signal sounds during this operation, check the informa- CAUTION

G020848 tion display in the center instrument panel • Any objects that impede the movement for messages. Button for changing level of folded power retract- of the power retractable hard top may able hard top 4. Lift the trunk divider (see page 101) to pro- damage the top or its mechanism. vide an opening into the trunk. Loading the trunk with the power When the power retractable hard top • 5. When the objects to be loaded have been retractable hard top down has been raised for loading the trunk, or placed in the trunk, press down the trunk When the power retractable hard top is down, if its movement has been interrupted by divider. it is folded in the trunk. Using the button shown pressing the button twice, the trunk in the illustration above, the folded power should not be closed. Doing so can 6. Press the button to move the power retractable hard top can be moved up or down damage the system or cause paint retractable hard top downward. Movement slightly to facilitate loading or unloading small damage. of the top can be stopped by pressing the objects. button again. To raise the level of the folded power 7. Close the trunk. retractable hard top: 1. Open the trunk.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 113 04 Interior

Trunk

NOTE Load anchoring eyelets 12-volt socket in trunk* The trunk cannot be closed while the folded power retractable hard top is in the upper position.

Raising and lowering the folded top in the event of a fault If the message ROOF FAILURE SEE MANUAL is displayed, the folded power 04 retractable hard top can only be lowered in the trunk.

CAUTION G020850 G020856 Damage may be unavoidable if the power retractable hard top must be operated when The eyelets in the trunk can be used to fasten Fold down the lid to use the socket. this message is displayed. accessory load and lashing straps, load nets, • Using the 12-volt socket while the engine and other load anchors. is not running drains the vehicle's battery. Press the button again and hold it down. After If the ignition is switched off and a device approximately 2 seconds, the power retracta- • drawing more that 0.1A is connected to a ble hard top will begin to move. Keep the but- socket, a battery alert will be shown in the ton depressed until the folded top is lowered. driver information display. An audible signal will sound during this entire • The cover should be kept on when the aux- operation. iliary socket is not in use.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Interior

Trunk

Carrying long loads (ski hatch) Opening the plastic hatch From the trunk, press the catches in the two holes in the hatch toward each other to release the hatch, and fold it down.

NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the optional ski bag, the bag’s zipper must be opened from the passenger’s compartment in order to insert objects through the ski hatch. 04 Replacing the backrest cushion Begin by guiding the lower section of the cush- ion into place. Then press the upper section of G021037 the cushion into place. Ski hatch The center section of the rear seat backrest NOTE can be opened to create space for carrying This cushion is locked in place when the long, light objects (max. length 6.5 ft/2 meters, vehicle is locked with the remote control. max. weight 55 lbs/25 kg). To do so, the center section (cushion) of the rear seat backrest must be removed, the tire repair kit (if the vehicle is Securing long objects so equipped) must be removed and stowed in Long objects should be secured with one of the the trunk, and the plastic hatch in the trunk rear seat belts. must be opened. Wrap the belt once around the object and lock the belt in the retractor as usual. If the vehicle Removing the center backrest cushion is equipped with the optional ski bag, pass the Pull the strap at the upper edge of the cushion, seat belt through the bag’s handle before fas- pull it forward, and lift it out. tening the seat belt.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 115 Remote key and key blade...... 118 Valet locking ...... 122 Keyless drive*...... 124 Locking and unlocking...... 128 Alarm*...... 130

Information Provided by:Provided Information

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM 05

Information Provided by:Provided Information 05 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Remote keys Immobilizer (start inhibitor) Remote key functions Two remote keys that also function as ignition Each of the keys supplied with your car con- keys are provided with your car. The remote tains a coded transponder. The code in the key keys contain detachable metal key blades for is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition manually locking or unlocking the driver's door switch where it is compared to the code stored and the glove compartment. in the start inhibitor module. The car will start only with a properly coded key. If you misplace USA – FCC ID: LTQVO315TX a key, take the other keys to an authorized This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Volvo retailer for reprogramming as an antitheft rules. Operation is subject to the following con- measure. ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept CAUTION any interference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation. Never use force on the narrow section of the remote key – this is where the transponder is located. The car cannot be started if the G019402 05 Canada – IC: 3659AVO315TX Operation is subject to the following condi- transponder is damaged. Lock – Press the Lock button on the tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- remote once to lock all doors and the trunk. ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter- USA – FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO The turn signals will flash once to confirm ference, including interference that may cause This device complies with part 15 of the FCC locking. undesired operation of the device. rules. Operation is subject to the following con- dition: (1) This device may not cause harmful NOTE Loss of a remote key interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interfer- The car can also be locked if a door is open If either of the remote keys is lost, the other ence that may cause undesired operation. (does not apply to vehicles with the optional must be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer. keyless drive). As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost Canada – IC: 3659A-WFS125VO remote key must be erased from the system. Operation is subject to the following condi- Each key blade has a unique code, which is tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- used if new key blades are required. A maxi- ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter- mum of six remote keys/key blades can be ference, including interference that may cause programmed and used for one car. undesired operation of the device.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 118 05 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the 2 minutes unless a door or the trunk has Panic alarm – This button can be used to remote once to unlock the driver's door. been opened. attract attention during emergency situa- After a short pause, press the Unlock but- • Automatic locking: When the car starts to tions. To activate the panic alarm, press ton a second time within 10 seconds to move, the doors and trunk can be locked and hold the red button for at least 3 sec- unlock the other doors and the trunk. A automatically. This feature can be turned onds or press it twice within 3 seconds. long press (at least several seconds) opens on or off, see Personal settings on page The turn signals and horn will be activated. all side windows. 75 for more information. The panic alarm will stop automatically • Airbag deployment will automatically after 30 seconds. To deactivate, wait NOTE attempt to unlock the doors. approximately 5 seconds and press the red button again. • The turn signals flash to confirm that the Approach lighting – As you approach the vehicle has been correctly locked/ car: Press the button on the remote key to unlocked with the remote key or the illuminate the area around the car in dark NOTE optional keyless drive. When locking the conditions. Pressing the button once lights This button will NOT unlock the car. vehicle, the turn signals will flash a con- up the interior lighting, parking lights, and firmation only if all the doors are license plate lighting. These lights will 05 securely closed and locked. Flashing switch off automatically after 30, 60 or Weak battery in the remote key confirmation for locking and unlocking 90 seconds. See the Personal settings pa may be customized in the vehicle's Per- ge 75 for information about adjusting the sonal settings menu, see page 75 for time setting. more information. Unlock trunk – Press the button once to • The two-step unlocking function can be disarm the alarm system and unlock only changed so that one press of the the trunk. After closing, the trunk will not Unlock button unlocks all of the doors automatically relock. Press Lock to relock and the trunk. See Personal settings it and rearm the alarm. page 75 for more information. NOTE • Automatic relocking: If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reen- This function will unlock, but not pop open, gage (re-lock) and the alarm will rearm after the trunk. G019406

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 119 05 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

When the battery begins to lose its charge, the The old battery should be disposed of properly Removing the key blade Information symbol in the instrument panel at a recycling center or by a trained and quali- Slide the spring loaded catch to the side. (see page 51) lights up and KEY BATTERY fied Volvo service technician. LOW VOLTAGE is shown in the information While holding the catch, pull the key blade out of the remote key. display. Key blade Reinserting the key blade in the remote Replacing the battery in the remote key key If the range of the transmitter is noticeably 1. Hold the remote key with the pointed end reduced, this indicates that the battery (type down. CR 2450, 3V) is weak and should be replaced. 2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. To replace the battery: 3. Gently press the key blade in the groove 1. Place the remote key with the keypad until it clicks into place. downward. Pry open the cover with a small slotted screwdriver. Unlocking the doors with the detached 05 2. Remove the cover. key blade 1. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the CAUTION driver's door lock. G019403 When replacing the battery, avoid touching 2. Turn the key blade clockwise approxi- the electrical circuitry in the other half of the Removing the key blade mately one-quarter turn to unlock the driv- remote key. er's door only. The key blade can be removed from the remote key. When removed, it can be used as follows: 3. Note how the + and – sides of the battery NOTE • To lock/unlock the driver’s door are positioned on the inside of the cover After unlocking the driver's door with the (see the underside of the cover). • To lock/unlock the glove compartment, key blade, opening the door will trigger the see page 129. 4. Pry out and replace the battery. Avoid alarm. touching the battery and its contact surfa- • To open the trunk mechanically, see ces with your fingers. page 129. To disable the alarm • For valet locking (see page 122) Press the Unlock button on the remote key, or 5. Press the cover back into place. insert the key in the ignition switch.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 120 05 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Locking the doors with the detached key blade 1. Lock the other door(s) by pressing the lock button on each door. Please note that this does not arm the alarm or lock the trunk. 2. Turn the key blade one-quarter turn coun- ter-clockwise to lock the driver's door.

05

Information Provided by:Provided Information 121 05 Locks and alarm

Valet locking

Locking points

05 G033493

Normal locking/unlocking points for the Locking/unlocking points for the remote remote key with the key blade in place key with the key blade removed (valet lock- (valet locking not activated): ing activated): Doors Doors Steering wheel lock Steering wheel lock Glove compartment By utilizing the remote key with the key blade removed, the valet locking feature enables you Compartments in door panels to block access to the trunk and glove com- Ski hatch partment, door panel compartments and the ski hatch for e.g., valet parking or when the car Trunk is brought to the retailer for service.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 122 05 Locks and alarm

Valet locking

Activating the valet locking function Turn the key blade 180° clockwise to lock the glove compartment and to lock points C, D, E, and F and disconnect these points from the central locking system (a mes- sage appears in the information display). Remove the key blade from the glove com- partment lock. Give the parking attendant or service person- nel only the remote key (with the key blade removed).

Deactivating the valet locking function Turn the key blade 180° counterclockwise in the glove compartment lock to deactivate valet G020032 locking (the trunk can then be unlocked using 05 the remote key). Begin by removing the key blade from the remote key (see page 120). For information on locking/unlocking the glove compartment normally, see page 128 NOTE The first stages of opening the power retractable hard top offer temporary access to the contents of the trunk. Therefore, before activating valet locking, the power retractable hard top must be up and the trunk divider (see page 101) must be open. This makes it impossible to operate the power retractable hard top.

Insert the key in the glove compartment lock.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 123 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

Keyless locking and unlocking Both of the remote keys provided with the vehi- Locking the vehicle cle have the keyless function, and additional remotes can be ordered. The system can accommodate up to six keyless drive remote keys.

NOTE The number of doors that are unlocked at the same time can be set in the Personal settings menu, see page 75 for additional information.

Unlocking the vehicle A keyless drive remote key must be on the

• G020033 G019418 same side of the vehicle as the door to be 05 Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters) Keyless drive lock button (1.5 meters) of the lock or the trunk opening control (see The doors and the trunk can be locked by the shaded areas in the illustration). This system makes it possible to unlock and pressing the lock button in any of the outside lock the vehicle without having to use the • Pull a door handle to unlock and open the door handles. remote key. It is only necessary to have a key- door or press the trunk opening control. less drive remote key in your possession to • See page 145 for information on starting a NOTE operate the central locking system. vehicle equipped with keyless drive. • If one or more doors and/or the trunk is not fully closed when the lock button is NOTE pressed, the door(s) or trunk will not be The buttons on the keyless drive remote key locked. can also be used to lock and unlock the • On keyless drive vehicles with an auto- vehicle, see page 118 for more information. matic transmission, the gear selector must be in the Park (P) position and the ignition must be switched off before the doors/trunk can be locked.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

Locking or unlocking the vehicle with the to unlock the driver's door only. This will NOTE key blade trigger the alarm. If several people carrying keyless drive • To disable the alarm: Press the Unlock remote keys approach the vehicle at the button on the keyless drive remote key. If same time, the driver's seat will assume the the batteries in the remote are weak, position it was in for the person who opens remove the keyless drive start control from a door first. the ignition switch by pressing the catch (see the illustration on page 145) and pull- ing the control out of the ignition switch. Keyless drive information messages Insert the ignition key section of a keyless If anyone leaves the vehicle with the only key- drive remote key in the ignition switch. less drive remote key in his or her possession while the ignition is switched on, a message will Keyless drive remote key and driver's be shown in the information display and an seat memory audible signal will sound. This function is only available on vehicles equipped with the optional power driver's seat. G020225 NOTE 05 When you leave the car with a keyless drive Keyless drive keyhole cover • This message will only be displayed if the remote key in your possession and lock start control is in position I or II. The driver's door on vehicles equipped with any door, the position of the driver's seat keyless drive can be locked or unlocked with will be stored in the seat's memory. The message will be erased from the display the remote key's detachable key blade if nec- • The next time a door is opened by a person and the audible signal will stop when the essary, see page 119 for information on remov- with the same remote key in his/her pos- remote key has been returned to the vehicle ing the key blade from the remote key. To session, the driver's seat will automatically and one of the following has occurred: access the keyhole in the driver's door: move to the position that it was in when the • A door has been opened and closed • Pry off the keyhole cover by inserting the door was most recently locked. key blade or a small screwdriver in the hole • The start control has been turned to posi- on the underside of the cover (indicated by tion 0 the arrow in the inset illustration). • The READ button (see page 56 for the • Insert the key blade as far as possible in the location of this button) has been pressed. driver's door lock. Turn the key blade clockwise approximately one-quarter turn

 Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

CAUTION KR55WK48964 NOTE • Keyless drive remote keys should never be left in the vehicle. In the event of a This device complies with part 15 of the FCC break-in, a remote found in the vehicle Rules. Operation is subject to the following two could make it possible to start the conditions: (1) This device may not cause engine. harmful interference, and (2) this device must • Electromagnetic fields or metal accept interference received, including inter- obstructions can interfere with the key- ference that may cause undesired operation. less drive system. Avoid placing the CAUTION remote key near cellular phones, metal- lic objects or e.g., in a metal briefcase. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Canada – IC:267T- 5WK48952, G020077 Siemens VDO 05 267T- 5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891 5WK48891 On the inside center of the rear bumper NOTE Tested To Comply With FCC Standards Under the floor of the trunk, near the rear This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry seat Canada. Operation is subject to the following For Automobile Use Left door handle two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must Location of the keyless drive antennas Under the rear section of the center con- accept interference received, including inter- The keyless drive system has a number of sole ference that may cause undesired operation. antennas located at various points in the vehi- Right door handle CAUTION cle. Under the front section of the center con- Changes or modifications not expressly sole approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952,

Information Provided by:Provided Information

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

WARNING People with implanted pacemakers should not allow the pacemaker to come closer than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless drive system's antennas. This is to help pre- vent interference between the pacemaker and the keylesss drive system.

05

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127 05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the NOTE inside • The doors cannot be opened by pulling up the lock buttons. • If both doors are closed when a lock button is pressed, the alarm will not be armed. • Each door can also be locked manually using the lock button on that particular door. This applies only if the car has not been locked from the outside. • The doors can also be unlocked (and the door opened) by pulling the handle G020867 in the door twice. Lock indicator light

05 G020865 Lock indicator lights The switches near the door opening handles on An indicator light in each door will illuminate for either door can be used to lock or unlock both approximately 5 minutes after the car has been doors and the trunk, and to set the alarm. locked using the remote key. Unlocking: Press the upper section of the • If doors are locked: The indicator lights will switch. flash once. Locking: Press the lower section of the • If doors are Unlocked: The indicator lights will flash twice lock button. • During driving with doors locked: The indi- cator lights will be Off.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 128 05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

Opening the trunk from the inside1 Mechanically opening the trunk Locking the glove compartment G016334 G020034 G030709 05 The vehicle is equipped with a florescent han- 1. Fold down the driver’s seat backrest to The glove compartment can only be locked dle on the inside of the trunk lid, which can be access the keyhole near the floor of the and unlocked using the detachable key blade used in an emergency situation to open the rear seat. on the remote key, see page 119 for informa- tion on removing the key blade from the remote trunk from the inside. 2. Fold up the tab covering the key hole. key. • Pull the handle down to release the trunk 3. Insert the key blade in the keyhole and turn lid. Insert the key blade in the glove compart- it 110 degrees clockwise. After use, the handle must be pushed back into ment lock. its original position before the trunk can be CAUTION Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. closed. This function should never be used when Remove the key blade from the lock. the power retractable hard top is in motion. This could cause damage to the trunk lid/ Unlock the glove compartment in the reverse hard top. order.

1 U.S. models only.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 129 05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

The alarm system The alarm indicator light • Fault in the alarm system: If a fault has The alarm is automatically armed whenever the been detected in the alarm system, a mes- car is locked with the remote key, or if a front sage will be shown in the information dis- lock button is depressed. play. Contact your Volvo retailer to have the alarm system inspected and repaired if When armed, the alarm continuously monitors necessary. a number of points on the car. The following conditions will trigger the alarm: Arming the alarm • The hood is forced open. Press the LOCK button on the remote key, • The trunk is forced open. or press the central lock button on one of • A door is forced open. the front doors with the door open. One long flash of the turn signals will confirm The ignition switch is tampered with • that the alarm is armed. • An attempt is made to start the car with a

non-approved key (a key not coded to the G020227 05 car's ignition). Disarming the alarm Alarm indicator light If there is movement in the passenger com- Press the UNLOCK button on the remote • 1 partment (if the car is equipped with the The status of the alarm system is indicated by key or insert the key in the ignition to dis- optional movement sensor). the indicator light on at the top of the dash- arm the alarm. Two short flashes from the board (see the illustration): car's direction indicators confirm that the The car is lifted or towed (if the car is equip- • alarm has been deactivated and that all ped with the optional inclination sensor) • Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed doors are unlocked. • The battery is disconnected (while the • The indicator light flashes every two sec- alarm is armed). onds – the alarm is armed • The siren is disconnected when the alarm • The indicator light flashes rapidly before is disarmed. the ignition is switched on – the alarm has • The alarm system functions in the same been triggered. The message ALARM way, regardless of whether the power TRIGGERED, CHECK CAR will also be retractable hard top is raised or lowered. displayed.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, press in the start control in the ignition switch.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

Turning off (stopping) the alarm Temporarily turning off the accessory In certain situations it may be desirable to turn If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by alarm sensor(s) off the accessory inclination and movement pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote alarm sensors, and the double locking function key or by inserting the key in the ignition switch. if, for example, you drive your vehicle onto a The driver's door must first be unlocked with ferry where the rocking of the boat could trigger the key blade. the alarm or if a pet is left in the vehicle with the doors locked. NOTE To do so: On vehicles equipped with the optional key- 1. Press MENU to enter the menu system and less drive, the start control must be scroll to Car settings (for a more detailed removed from the ignition switch before the description of the menus, see page 75. key can be inserted, see page 145 for instructions. 2. Select Reduced guard. 3. Select Activate once and the message Audible/visual alarm signal Reduced guard – See manual will 05 appear in the information display. The An audible alarm signal is given by a battery alarm sensors and/or double locking func- powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for tion will be turned off when the vehicle is 30 seconds. locked. NOTE or

The visual alarm signal is given by flashing G026313 Select Ask on exit. Each time the ignition all turn signals and turning on the interior key is turned to position 0, the message lighting for approximately 5 minutes. Display Press ENTER to reduce guard until MENU engine is started. Press EXIT to cancel will be displayed. Select one of the EXIT alternatives: ENTER Menu navigation controls

 Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131 05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

• If the alarm sensors are to be deactivated, Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) press ENTER and then lock the vehicle. Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation • If the vehicle is equipped with the double is subject to the following conditions: (1) this locking function, it will be deactivated at device may not cause interference, and (2) this the same time. device must accept any interference, including The next time the ignition key is turned to posi- interference that may cause undesired opera- tion II, the sensors will be reactivated and Full tion of the device. guard will displayed. or • If you do not wish to deactivate the sen- sors, do not choose an alternative and lock the vehicle or press EXIT and lock the vehi- cle.

05 CAUTION • The accessory sensors are automati- cally reconnected to the alarm system the next time the vehicle is unlocked and then locked again. • This function will not turn off the vehi- cle's standard alarm.

U.S.A. FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following con- ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

05

Information Provided by:Provided Information 133 134 *

Option/accessory, for more information, seeIntroduction...... 166 Park assist*...... 162 Blind SpotInformationSystem (BLIS)*...... Transporting loads...... 160 Detachable trailerhitch...... 158 Towing atrailer...... 157 Jump starting...... 154 Towing...... 152 Stability system...... 150 Brake system...... 149 Shiftlock override...... 147 Automatic transmission*...... 146 Manual transmission,6-speed*...... 145 Starting thevehiclewithkeylessdrive*...... 143 Starting thevehicle...... 142 Ignition switch...... 139 Fuel requirements...... 136 General information...... I nf or mat i on Pr ov i ded by : ...... 161 ......

G020912 STARTING AND DRIVING 06

Information Provided by:Provided Information 06 Starting and driving

General information

Economical driving conserves natural • At highway driving speeds, fuel consump- Weight distribution affects handling resources tion will be lower with the air conditioning At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a Better driving economy may be obtained by on and the windows closed than with the tendency to understeer, which means that the air conditioning off and the windows open. thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops steering wheel has to be turned more than and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to • Using the onboard trip computer's fuel might seem appropriate for the curvature of a immediate traffic conditions. consumption modes can help you learn bend. This ensures good stability and reduces how to drive more economically. the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that Observe the following rules: these properties can alter with the vehicle load. Other factors that decrease gas mileage • Bring the engine to normal operating tem- The heavier the load in the cargo area, the less perature as soon as possible by driving are: the tendency to understeer. with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for • Dirty air cleaner the first few minutes of operation. A cold Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter • Handling, roadholding engine uses more fuel and is subject to • Dragging brakes increased wear. Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure • Incorrect front end alignment • Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check for driving short distances. This does not Some of the above mentioned items and others that the tires are inflated to the recommended allow the engine to reach normal operating are checked at the standard maintenance pressure according to the vehicle load. See the temperature. intervals. "Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis- tributed so that capacity weight or maximum Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration • permissible axle loads are not exceeded. 06 and hard braking. WARNING • Use the transmission's Drive (D) position Driving with the trunk open: Driving with as often as possible and avoid using kick- the trunk open could lead to poisonous Driving through water down. exhaust gases entering the passenger com- The vehicle can be driven through water up to partment. If the trunk must be kept open for • Do not exceed posted speed limits. a depth of approximately 9 in. (25 cm), at a any reason, proceed as follows: maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra • 1. Close the windows. load) in the vehicle. • Take particular care when driving through 2. Set the ventilation system control to air flowing water. Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire • flow to floor, windshield and side win- pressure regularly (when tires are cold). • Clean the electrical connections for trailer dows and the blower control to its high- wiring after driving in mud or water • Remove snow tires when threat of snow or est setting. ice has ended. • When driving through water, maintain low speed and do not stop in the water.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 136 06 Starting and driving

General information

WARNING Cold weather precautions or in warm weather, see page 271 for more If you wish to check your vehicle before the information. After driving through water, press lightly on the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes approach of cold weather, the following advice • The load placed on the battery is greater are functioning normally. Water or mud can is worth noting: during the winter since the windshield wip- ers, lighting, etc. are used more often. make the brake linings slippery, resulting in • Make sure that the engine coolant contains delayed braking effect. Moreover, the capacity of the battery 50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture decreases as the temperature drops. In will reduce freeze protection. This gives very cold weather, a poorly charged bat- CAUTION protection against freezing down to –31 °F tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there- (–35 °C). See section "Coolant". The use of fore advisable to check the state of charge • Engine damage will occur if water is "recycled" antifreeze is not approved by drawn into the air cleaner. more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil Volvo. Different types of antifreeze must on the battery posts. • If the vehicle is driven through water not be mixed. • Volvo recommends the use of snow tires deeper than 9 in. (25 cm), water may • Volvo recommends using only genuine enter the differential and the transmis- on all four wheels for winter driving – see Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator. the chapter "Wheels and tires." sion. This reduces the oil's lubricating Your Volvo retailer stocks plenty of Volvo capacity and may shorten the service engine coolant to help protect your vehicle • To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from life of these components. during cold weather. freezing, add washer solvents containing antifreeze (see page 213 for the location of • Do not allow the vehicle to stand in • Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this the washer fluid reservoir). This is impor- water up to the door sills longer than prevents the formation of condensation in absolutely necessary. This could result tant since dirt is often splashed on the 06 the tank. In addition, in extremely cold windshield during winter driving, requiring in electrical malfunctions. weather conditions it is worthwhile to add the frequent use of the washers and wip- • If the engine has been stopped while the fuel line de-icer before refueling. ers. Volvo Washer Solvent should be dilu- car is in water, do not attempt to restart • The viscosity of the engine oil is important. ted as follows: Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): the engine. Have the car towed out of Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves 1 part washer solvent and 4 parts water the water. cold-weather starting as well as decreas- Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer sol- ing fuel consumption while the engine is vent and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F warming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, par- (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts ticularly the synthetic type1, is recom- mended. Be sure to use good quality oil but do not use cold-weather oil for hard driving

1 Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer.  Information Provided by:Provided Information 137 06 Starting and driving

General information

water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part NOTE • Check state of the battery's charge. washer solvent and 1 part water. Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as If the ignition is switched on, a warning • Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks. • well), and replace those that are worn. • message will be displayed in the text Check tire pressures. window in the instrument panel when NOTE the battery charge is low. • The brakes, front wheel alignment, and steering gear should be checked by your Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can An energy conserving function • Volvo retailer only. cause damage to the locks. designed into the vehicle's electrical system will switch off certain functions • Check all lights, including high beams. or reduce the load on the battery by, • Reflective warning triangles are legally Conserving electrical current e.g., reducing the audio system's vol- required in some states/provinces. ume. Keep the following in mind to help minimize • Have a word with your Volvo retailer if you battery drain: intend to drive in countries where it may be difficult to obtain the correct fuel. • When the engine is not running, avoid turn- Before a long distance trip ing the ignition key to position II. Many Consider your destination. If you will be It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle • electrical systems (the audio system, the driving through an area where snow or ice checked at a trained and qualified Volvo serv- optional navigation system, power win- are likely to occur, consider snow tires. dows, etc) will function with the ignition key ice technician before driving long distances. in position I. This position reduces drain on Your trained and qualified Volvo service tech- the battery. nician will also be able to supply you with 06 • Please keep in mind that using systems, bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for accessories, etc that consume a great deal your use in the event that problems occur. of current when the engine is not running As a minimum, the following items should be could result in the battery being completely checked before any long trip: drained. • Check that engine runs smoothly and that • The optional 12 volt socket in the trunk fuel consumption is normal. (certain models only) provides electrical current even with the ignition switched off, • Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage which drains the battery. • Have the transmission oil level checked2. • Check condition of drive belts.

2 To prevent injury from contact with hot surfaces, do not inspect your vehicle's transmission fluid yourself. Have your vehicle's transmission fluid level inspected by a qualified Volvo service technician.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 138 06 Starting and driving

Fuel requirements

Octane rating engine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos- Use of Additives sible operation. With the exception of gas line antifreeze during Minimum octane winter months, do not add solvents, thicken- NOTE ers, or other store-bought additives to your vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. When switching to higher octane fuel or changing gasoline brands, it may be neces- Overuse may damage your engine, and some sary to fill the tank more than once before a of these additives contain organically volatile difference in engine operation is noticeable. chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself to these chemicals. Fuel Formulations Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a WARNING knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives. Never carry a cell phone that is switched Besides damaging the exhaust emission con- on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone G028920 trol systems on your vehicle, lead has been rings, this may cause a spark that could strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and Typical pump octane label injury. Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per- Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. formance, but using 87 octane or above will not Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to affect engine reliability. certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area WARNING where you must fill your own gas tank, take Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, Volvo engines are designed to achieve rated 06 precautions. These may include: and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust horsepower, torque, and fuel economy per- gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes formance using premium 91 octane fuel. • standing upwind away from the filler nozzle inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger while refueling compartment is ventilated, and immediately Demanding driving • refueling only at gas stations with vapor return the vehicle to a trained and qualified In demanding driving conditions, such as oper- recovery systems that fully seal the mouth Volvo service technician for correction. ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer, of the filler neck during refueling or driving for extended periods at higher alti- • wearing neoprene gloves while handling a tudes than normal, it may be advisable to fuel filler nozzle. switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to change gasoline brands to fully utilize your

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 139 06 Starting and driving

Fuel requirements

Deposit control gasoline (detergent ness of the emission control system and could use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; how- additives) result in loss of emission warranty coverage. ever, the octane ratings listed on this page Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas- State and local vehicle inspection programs must still be met. will make detection of misfueling easier, pos- oline to control engine deposits. Detergent Alcohol – Ethanol: Fuels containing up to 10% sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis- gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and ethanol by volume may be used. Ethanol may fueled vehicles. intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit also be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gaso- control gasolines will help ensure good driva- hol". bility and fuel economy. If you are not sure NOTE whether the gasoline contains deposit control Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to 15% Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain MTBE may be used. additives, check with the service station oper- an octane enhancing additive called methyl- ator. cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl Methanol (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission Do not use gasolines containing methanol NOTE Control System performance may be affec- ted, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc- (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice Volvo does not recommend the use of tion indicator lamp) located on your instru- can result in vehicle performance deterioration store-bought fuel injector cleaning addi- ment panel may light. If this occurs, please and can damage critical parts in the fuel sys- tives. return your vehicle to a trained and qualified tem. Such damage may not be covered under Volvo service technician for maintenance. the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Unleaded fuel Fuel filler door 06 Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers Press the button on the light switch panel (see and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing the illustration on page 59) Canadian regulations require that pumps deliv- "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or with the ignition ering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEA- ethers. In some areas, state or local laws switched off to unlock the fuel filler door. DED". Only these pumps have nozzles which require that the service pump be marked indi- Please note that the fuel filler door will remain fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis- cating use of alcohols or ethers. However, unlocked until the vehicle begins to move for- pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled there are areas in which the pumps are ward. An audible click will be heard when the "unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is fuel filler door relocks. damages the three-way catalytic converter and alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated with the service station operator. To meet sea- being refueled, this feature enables you to lock use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective- sonal air quality standards, some areas require the doors/trunk while leaving the fuel filler door the use of "oxygenated" fuel. Volvo allows the unlocked.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 140 06 Starting and driving

Fuel requirements

You can also keep the vehicle locked if you CAUTION under the New Vehicle Limited War- remain inside it during refueling. The central ranty. locking button does not lock the fuel filler door. • Do not refuel with the engine running1. Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed and ignition is on, an incorrect reading could is completely closed after refueling. Open the occur in the fuel gauge fuel filler cap slowly during hot weather. • After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it clicks into Refueling place. The fuel tank is designed to accommodate • Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not possible expansion of the fuel in hot weather, press the handle on the filler nozzle see page 269 for fuel tank volume. Be aware more than one extra time. Too much fuel that the "usable" tank capacity will be some- in the tank in hot weather conditions can what less than the specified maximum. When cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling the fuel level is low, such factors as ambient could also cause damage to the emis- temperature, the fuel's "Reid vapor pressure" sion control systems. characteristics, and terrain can affect the fuel • Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. pump's ability to supply the engine with an In addition to causing damage to the adequate supply of fuel. Therefore, it is advis- environment, gasolines containing able to refuel as soon as possible when the alcohol can cause damage to painted 06 needle nears the red zone, or when the fuel surfaces, which may not be covered warning light comes on. under the New Vehicle Limited War- ranty. • Do not use gasolines containing meth- anol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice can result in vehicle per- formance deterioration and can dam- age critical parts in the fuel system. Such damage may not be covered

1 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle’s performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 141 06 Starting and driving

Ignition switch

Ignition switch positions II – Drive position The key's position when driv- 0 – Locked position ing. The vehicle's entire elec- Remove the key to lock the trical system is activated. steering wheel1. Never turn the key to position 0 while driving or when the vehicle is being towed. III – Start position Turn the key to this position NOTE and release it immediately. The key returns automatically A ticking sound may be audible if the key is to the Drive position. turned to a position between 0 and I. To stop this sound, turn the key to position II A chime will sound if the key and back to position 0. is left in the ignition and the driver's door is opened (does not apply to vehi- I – Intermediate position2 cles with the optional keyless drive). Certain accessories, radio, etc. on, daytime running lights 06 off.

1 Automatic transmission: the gear selector must be in the Park position. The optional keyless drive start control does not need to be removed. 2 Please be aware that leaving the key in this positions I or II will increase battery drain.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 142 06 Starting and driving

Starting the vehicle

To start the engine 3. The vehicle is equipped with an autostart NOTE feature. Without touching the throttle WARNING pedal, turn the key to position III and • Immobilizer: If two of the keys to your Before starting, check that the seat, steering release it. The starter motor will then oper- vehicle are close together, e.g., on the wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly. ate automatically (for up to ten seconds) same key ring when you try to start the Make sure the brake pedal can be until the engine starts. If the engine fails to vehicle, this could cause interference in depressed completely. Adjust the seat if start, repeat this step. the immobilizer system and result in the necessary. vehicle not starting. If this should occur, 4. To release the gear selector from the Park remove one of the keys from the key 1. Fasten the seat belt. (P) position, the engine must be running (or ring before trying to start the vehicle the ignition key must be in position II) and again. 2. Apply the parking brake if not already set. the brake pedal must be depressed. • Keylock: Models equipped an auto- The gear selector should be locked in the 5. Select the desired gear. On models with an matic transmission have a keylock sys- Park (P) position (Shiftlock). See also page tem. When the engine is switched off, 149. automatic transmission, the gear engages after a very slight delay which is especially the gear selector must be in the Park Manual transmission: The clutch must be noticeable when selecting R. (P) position before the key can be fully depressed. removed from the ignition switch1. • When starting in cold weather, the NOTE transmission may shift up at slightly higher engine speeds than normal until After a cold start, idle speed may be notice- the automatic transmission fluid rea- 06 ably higher than normal for a short period. ches normal operating temperature. This is done to help bring components in the emission control system to their normal • Do not race a cold engine immediately operating temperature as quickly as possi- after starting. Oil flow may not reach ble, which enables them to control emis- some lubrication points fast enough to sions and help reduce the vehicle's impact prevent engine damage. on the environment.

1 The optional keyless drive start control does not need to be removed from the ignition switch.  Information Provided by:Provided Information 143 06 Starting and driving

Starting the vehicle

WARNING Volvo's floor mats are specially manufac- tured for your car. They must be firmly secured in the clips on the floor so that they cannot slide and become trapped under the pedals on the driver's side. • Always place the gear selector in Park (P) (manual transmission: first or reverse gear) and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle.and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehi- cle. Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running. • Always open garage doors fully before starting the engine inside a garage to ensure adequate ventilation. The exhaust gases contain carbon monox- ide, which is invisible and odorless but very poisonous. 06 CAUTION Automatic transmission: The engine should be idling when you move the gear selector. Never accelerate until after you feel the transmission engage! Accelerating immediately after selecting a gear will cause harsh engagement and premature trans- mission wear. Selecting P or N when idling at a standstill for prolonged periods of time will help prevent overheating of the auto- matic transmission fluid.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 144 06 Starting and driving

Starting the vehicle with keyless drive*

Starting a vehicle with keyless drive 1. Press the brake pedal (the clutch pedal must also be fully depressed on models with a manual transmission). 2. Press in the keyless drive start control and turn it to position III.

NOTE The vehicle is equipped with an autostart function that makes it possible to start the engine without holding the start control in position III. Turn the start control to posi- tion III and release it. The starter motor will then operate automatically (for up to ten seconds) until the engine starts. G019420 G019410 Removing the keyless drive start control Starting the vehicle with the ignition key Keyless drive makes it possible to unlock, start Press the catch on the side of the start con- and lock the vehicle without using a remote (remote key) trol (see the illustration). key. A vehicle with keyless drive can also be started with the ignition key (if, for example, the battery Pull the keyless drive start control out of the A start control is fitted in the ignition switch on in the keyless drive remote key is weak). To do ignition switch. 06 vehicles equipped with the optional keyless so: Insert the remote key into the ignition switch drive. This control is used in the same way as the ignition key to start the engine. See also and turn it to position III to start the engine, page 143 for general information on starting page 143 for complete starting information. the engine.

NOTE A keyless drive remote key must be inside the vehicle in order to start the engine.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145 06 Starting and driving

Manual transmission, 6-speed*

6-speed manual transmission Engaging reverse gear, 6-speed CAUTION transmission Never shift into reverse while moving for- ward.

WARNING An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause the accelerator, brake, and/or clutch pedal to catch. Check that the movement of these pedals is not impeded. Not more than one protective floor covering may be used at one time. G018258 G018259 • Depress the clutch pedal completely when changing gears1 Reverse gear should only be engaged from a • Remove your foot from the clutch pedal complete stop. 06 while driving. The shift pattern should be followed. NOTE • Overdrive (5th and 6th gears) should be Reverse gear is electronically blocked to used as often as possible to help improve help prevent it from being selected while the fuel economy. vehicle is moving foward.

1 Clutch interlock: The clutch must be fully depressed before you can start your car. If the clutch is notdepressed, it will not be possible to start the engine.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Automatic transmission*

Shiftgate positions Gear selector positions R – Reverse The car must be stationary when shifting to P – Park position R. Select the P position when starting or parking. In P, the transmission is mechanically blocked N – Neutral (Shiftlock). Always apply the parking brake N is the neutral position. The engine can be when parking. started, but no gear is selected. Apply the park- ing brake when the car is stationary with the gear selector in N.

NOTE If the gear selector is in the Neutral position and the vehicle has been at a standstill for at least 3 seconds, the brake pedal must be

G020237 pressed before the gear selector can be moved to another position. Depress the button on the front of the gear selector knob to move the selector between In order to move the gear selector to another the R, N, D, and P positions. position: The gear selector can be moved freely between 1. Turn the ignition key to position II (if the 06 the (manual shifting) and Drive (D) G018264 engine is not already running). positions while driving. D - left position: automatic shifting, M - right posi- 2. Depress the brake pedal. tion: manual shifting 3. Move the gear selector to the desired posi- CAUTION tion. The car must be stationary when selecting D – Drive position P. D is the normal driving position. The Drive posi- tion offers 5 forward gears1. The car automat- ically shifts between the various forward gears,

1 T5 models have 6 forward gears.  Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147 06 Starting and driving

Automatic transmission*

based on the level of acceleration and speed. time and will utilize the braking power of Kickdown will not occur if the driver attempts The car must be at a standstill when shifting to the engine. If the current speed is too high to use this function when engine speeds are position D from position R. for using a lower gear, the downshift will too high. The transmission will remain in the not occur until the speed has decreased currently selected gear. enough to allow the lower gear to be used. Manual shifting – Geartronic • If you slow to a very low speed, the trans- The manual shifting mode (Geartronic) can be mission will automatically shift down. selected at any time to manually select forward gears, including while the car is moving. Cold starts (turbo engines) NOTE When driving before the engine has reached its normal operating temperature, the transmis- Reverse, Neutral, and Park cannot be sion will shift up at slightly higher engine selected in Geartronic mode. speeds to heat the three-way catalytic con- verter as quickly as possible. • To access the Manual (M) shifting position from Drive (D), move the gear selector to the right to M. Kickdown • To return to the Drive (D) position from M, Automatic shift to a lower gear (kickdown) is move the gear selector to the left. achieved by depressing the accelerator pedal 06 fully and briskly. An upshift will occur when While driving approaching the top speed for a particular gear • If you select the M position while driving, or by releasing the accelerator pedal slightly. the gear that was being used in the Drive Kickdown can be used for maximum acceler- position will also initially be selected in the ation or when passing at highway speeds. M position. Safety function • Move the gear selector forward To help prevent excessive engine speeds (rpm) (toward "+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward (toward "–") to shift to a lower that could lead to engine damage, the engine gear. management system includes a function that prevents kickdown from taking place if the • If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the engine speed is too high. transmission will downshift one gear at a

Information Provided by:Provided Information

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Shiftlock override

Overriding the shiftlock system 4. Insert the key blade, see page 120, into the opening and press it down until it bottoms. 5. With the key blade pressed down, move the gear selector out of the P position. G018263

Shiftlock prevents the gear selector from being moved out of the Pposition unless the ignition key is in position II and the brake pedal is depressed. 06 In certain cases it may be necessary to move the gear selector from the Pposition manually. To manually override the Shiftlock system: 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Depress the brake pedal. 3. There is a small cover below P-R-N-D on the gear selector panel. Open the rear edge of the panel.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 149 06 Starting and driving

Brake system

Brake circuit malfunction Power brakes function only when the Severe strain on the brake system The brake system is a hydraulic system con- engine is running The brakes will be subject to severe strain sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a prob- The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or lem should occur in one of these circuits, it is which is only created when the engine is run- when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually still possible to stop the vehicle with the other ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the slower, which means that the cooling of the brake circuit. engine switched off. brakes is less efficient than when driving on level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes, If the brake pedal must be depressed farther If the power brakes are not working, consider- shift into a lower gear and let the engine help than normal and requires greater foot pressure, ably higher pressure will be required on the with the braking. Do not forget that if you are the stopping distance will be longer. brake pedal to compensate for the lack of towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to power assistance. This can happen for exam- A warning light in the instrument panel will light a greater than normal load. up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred. ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine is switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The If this light comes on while driving or braking, brake pedal feels harder than usual. Anti-lock brakes (ABS) stop immediately and check the brake fluid The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to level in the reservoir. Water on brake discs and brake pads improve vehicle control (stopping and steering) affects braking during severe braking conditions by limiting NOTE brake lockup. When the system "senses" Driving in rain and slush or passing through an impending lockup, braking pressure is auto- Press the brake pedal hard and maintain automatic car wash can cause water to collect pressure on the pedal – do not pump the matically modulated in order to help prevent 06 on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a brakes. lockup that could lead to a skid. delay in braking effect when the pedal is depressed. To avoid such a delay when the The system performs a self-diagnostic test WARNING brakes are needed, depress the pedal occa- when the engine is started and when the sionally when driving through rain, slush, etc. vehicle first reaches a speed of approxi- If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the This will remove the water from the brakes. mately 12 mph (20 km/h). The brake pedal will reservoir or if a brake system message is pulsate several times and a sound may be shown in the information display, DO NOT Check that brake application feels normal. This DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a Volvo should also be done after washing or starting audible from the ABS control module. This is retailer and have the brake system inspec- in very damp or cold weather. normal. ted.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 150 06 Starting and driving

Brake system

For optimal ABS braking effect: WARNING NOTE 1. Press down on the brake pedal with full force. The pedal will pulsate. If the BRAKES and ABS warning symbols • When the EBA system is activated, the light at the same time, there may be a prob- brake pedal will go down and pressure 2. Steer the vehicle in the direction of travel lem in the brake system. If the brake fluid in the brake system immediately increa- and keep the brake pedal depressed. level is normal in these circumstances, drive ses to the maximum level. You must carefully to a trained and qualified Volvo maintain full pressure on the brake Electronic Brake Force Distribution service technician to have the brake system pedal in order to utilize the system com- checked. (EBD) pletely. There will be no braking effect if EBD is an integrated part of the ABS system. the pedal is released. EBA is automati- EBD regulates the hydraulic pressure to the Emergency Brake Assistance – EBA cally deactivated when the brake pedal rear brakes to help provide optimal braking EBA is designed to provide full brake effect is released. capacity. immediately in the event of sudden, hard brak- • When the vehicle has been parked for The switching of the ABS modulator will be ing. The system is activated by the speed with some time, the brake pedal may sink audible and the brake pedal will pulsate during which the brake pedal is depressed. more than usual when the engine is braking. Please be aware that ABS does not When the EBA system is activated, the brake started. This is normal and the pedal will return to its usual position when it is increase the absolute braking potential of the pedal will go down and pressure in the brake released. vehicle. While control will be enhanced, ABS system immediately increases to the maximum will not shorten stopping distances on slippery level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal surfaces. in order to utilize the system completely. EBA 06 If the warning lamp lights up there is a mal- is automatically deactivated when the brake function of the ABS system (the standard brak- pedal is released. ing system will still function) and the vehicle should be driven cautiously to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspec- tion.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 151 06 Starting and driving

Stability system

Dynamic Stability Traction Control Temporarily switching off Spin control (DSTC) 1. Turn the thumbwheel (A) on the left-side The stability system consists of a number of steering wheel lever until the DSTC menu functions designed help reduce wheel spin, is displayed. counteract skidding, and to generally help 2. Hold down the RESET button (B) to toggle improve directional stability. between DSTC SPIN CONTROL ON or A pulsating sound will be audible when the OFF. system is actively operating and is normal. NOTE Traction control (TC) This function is designed to help reduce wheel • The message DSTC SPIN CONTROL spin by transferring power from a drive wheel OFF indicates that the stability sys- that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the tem's spin control function has tempo- G020349 opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle). rarily been switched off. TC is most active at low speeds. Thumb wheel • The stability control indicator light will illuminate and remain on until spin This is one of the stability system's permanent RESET button control has been reactivated. functions and cannot be switched off. • The spin control function is automati- Spin control (SC) cally enabled each time the engine is 06 The spin control function is designed to help started. prevent the drive wheels from spinning while the vehicle is accelerating. • DSTC ON indicates that all system functions are active. Under certain circumstances, such as when driving with snow chains, or driving in deep snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to Active yaw control – AYC (DSTC only) temporarily switch off this function for maxi- This function helps maintain directional stabil- mum tractive force. ity, for example when cornering, by braking one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 152 06 Starting and driving

Stability system

This is one of the stability system's permanent Information symbol WARNING functions and cannot be switched off. The stability system is intended to help improve driving safety. It supplements, but WARNING can never replace, the driver's judgement and responsibility when operating the vehi- The car's handling and stability characteris- If the and symbols light up at the same tics will be altered if the DSTC system func- cle. Speed and driving style should always tions have been disabled. time, read the message in the display. be adapted to traffic and road conditions. If only the symbol lights up, this indicates DSTC-related messages in the text one of the following situations: window • The light illuminates for approximately • "TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY 2 seconds to indicate that the system is OFF" – The system has been temporarily performing a self-diagnostic test when the switched off due to high brake temperature engine is started. and will automatically switch on again • If the light flashes while driving, this indi- when the brakes have cooled. cates that the stability system is actively • "ANTI SKID SERVICE REQUIRED" – the functioning to help counteract wheel spin system has been automatically disen- and/or a skid. gaged due to a fault. A trained and qualified • If this light stays on after the engine has Volvo service technician retailer should started or comes on while driving, there 06 check the system. may be a fault in the stability system. Con- sult a trained and qualified Volvo service Symbols used by the stability system technician. If Spin control has been intentionally Stability system indicator light • switched off, a message is displayed and the light will stay on as a reminder that this function has been disabled by the driver.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 153 06 Starting and driving

Towing

Emergency towing G020953

The towing eyelet is located in the tool bag, Press the cover back into position. Towing a vehicle with all four wheels on which is stowed in the ski hatch. This eyelet the ground must be screwed into the positions provided 06 on the right sides of either the front or rear WARNING WARNING bumper (see the illustration). Do not use the towing eyelets to pull the Volvo does not recommend towing a disa- To attach the towing eyelet: vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck. bled vehicle behind another vehicle. Signif- 1. Press the mark on the lower edge of the icant difficulty in steering and braking, com- bined with unfavorable weather, traffic, and cover (1) to open it. road conditions may make it impossible to 2. Screw the towing eyelet (3) in place first by maintain vehicle control. hand and then using the tire iron until it is securely in place. 1. Apply the parking brake. After the vehicle has been towed, the eye- let should be removed and returned to the tool bag.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 154 06 Starting and driving

Towing

WARNING • Keep the tow rope taut at all times while the CAUTION vehicle is in motion. Towing a vehicle with a locked steering Check with state and local authorities The disabled vehicle should be towed in • wheel will make the vehicle impossible to • before attempting this type of towing, the forward direction only. steer. as vehicles being towed are subject to regulations regarding maximum towing WARNING 2. Insert the key into the ignition to unlock the speed, length and type of towing steering wheel. The steering wheel must be • Never allow a vehicle to be towed with- device, lighting, marker flags, etc. unlocked. With the engine off and the vehi- out a driver behind the wheel of the dis- • Never attempt to push- or tow-start a cle at a standstill, great effort will be abled vehicle. vehicle with a dead battery. This would required to turn the steering wheel. • Never remove the key from the ignition inject unburned fuel into the three-way catalytic converter(s), causing over- 3. Turn the ignition key to position II. while the vehicle is moving. The steering wheel could lock, making it impossible heating, backfiring, and damage, see 4. Place the gear selector in neutral. For vehi- to steer the vehicle. page 157 for instructions on jump star- ting the vehicle. cles with automatic transmissions, follow • When the engine is not running, steering instruction on page 149, "Shiftlock over- resistance and the effort needed to ride" to allow the gear selector to be moved apply the brakes will be great. from the Park position. Towing vehicles with front wheel drive • Never attempt to tow a vehicle with a Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equip- 5. Keep firm pressure on the brake pedal dead battery at night. ment for towing vehicles with front wheel drive. while releasing the parking brake. If wheel lift equipment must be used, please 06 6. When towing has been completed, return use extreme caution to help avoid damage to the gear selector to Park (automatic) or the vehicle. Reverse (manual) and apply the parking In this case, the vehicle should be towed with brake. the rear wheels on the ground if at all possible. The following points should also be If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehicle observed: with the front wheels on the ground, please • Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Never refer to the towing information on the previous exceed local towing speed limits and heed page. all local towing restrictions. • Never tow farther than 50 miles (80 km).

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 155 06 Starting and driving

Towing

• Sling-type equipment applied at the front will damage radiator and air conditioning lines. • It is equally important not to use sling-type equipment at the rear or apply lifting equip- ment inside the rear wheels; serious dam- age to the rear axle may result. • If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed truck, the towing eyelets must not be used to secure the vehicle on the flat bed. Con- sult the tow truck operator.

WARNING • Remember that the power brakes and power steering will not function when engine is not running. The braking and steering systems will function but con- siderably higher pressure will be required on the brake pedal and greater 06 steering effort must be exerted. • The towing eyelets must not be used for pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for any similar purpose involving severe strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 156 06 Starting and driving

Jump starting

Jump starting the vehicle your vehicle's battery (2), marked with a WARNING "+" sign. • Do not connect the jumper cable to any 3. Connect the auxiliary battery's negative (–) part of the fuel system or to any moving terminal (3) to the ground point in your parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds. vehicle's engine compartment near the Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which driver's side spring strut (4). • is flammable and explosive. 4. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle, • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do then start the engine in the vehicle with not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, dead battery. skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con- 5. After the engine has started, first remove tact occurs, flush the affected area the negative (–) terminal jumper cable. immediately with water. Obtain medical Then remove the positive (+) terminal help immediately if eyes are affected. jumper cable. • Never expose the battery to open flame

G020298 or electric spark. WARNING • Do not smoke near the battery. Follow these instructions to jump start your Failure to follow the instructions for vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! • jump starting can lead to personal vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- injury. 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another sories contain lead and lead compounds, 06 vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touch- chemicals known to the state of California • Do not touch the jumper cables during ing to prevent premature completion of a cir- to cause cancer and reproductive harm. the attempt to start the vehicle. This Wash hands after handling. could cause sparks. cuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instruc- tions provided for the other vehicle. To jump start your vehicle: 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. First connect the auxiliary battery positive (+) terminal (1) to the positive (+) terminal in

Information Provided by:Provided Information 157 06 Starting and driving

Towing a trailer

General information • Engine and transmission are subject to WARNING Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant • Bumper-attached trailer hitches must hitches that are specially designed for the temperature should be closely watched • not be used on Volvos, nor should vehicle. when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn off the air con- safety chains be attached to the Maximum trailer weights recommended by ditioner if the temperature gauge needle bumper. Volvo are: enters the red range. • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle's • Trailers without brakes: 1,540 lbs • If the automatic transmission begins to rear axle must not be used. (700 kg). overheat, a message will be displayed in • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic • Trailers with brakes: 2,000 lbs (900 kg) the information display. brake system directly to the vehicle Observe the legal requirements of the • Avoid overload and other abusive opera- brake system, nor a trailer's lighting state/province in which the vehicles are tion. system directly to the vehicle lighting registered. system. Consult your nearest trained Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil- • and qualified Volvo service technician • The maximum recommended hitch ity, and economy. tongue load is 165 lbs (75 kg). for correct installation. It is necessary to balance trailer brakes • When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety • All Volvo models are equipped with with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a • wire must be correctly fastened to the energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump- safe stop (check and observe state/local hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch ers. Trailer hitch installation should not regulations). interfere with the proper operation of this on the vehicle. The safety wire should • Do not connect the trailer's brake system never be fastened to or wound around 06 bumper system. directly to the vehicle's brake system. the drawbar ball. Trailer towing does not normally present any • More frequent vehicle maintenance is particular problems, but take into considera- required. tion: • Remove the ball and drawbar assembly • Increase tire pressure to recommended when the hitch is not being used. full. See the chapter "Wheels and tires." • Volvo recommends the use of synthetic • When your vehicle is new, avoid towing engine oil when towing a trailer over long heavy trailers during the first 620 miles distances or in mountainous areas. (1,000 km). • Maximum speed when towing a trailer: 50 mph (80 km/h).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 158 06 Starting and driving

Towing a trailer

NOTE • When parking the vehicle with a trailer on a hill, apply the parking brake before putting the gear selector in Park (P) or in reverse on models with a manual transmission. Always follow the trailer manufacturer's recommendations for wheel chocking. • If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift positions while towing a trailer, or if the vehicle is equipped with a manual trans- mission, make sure the gear you select does not put too much strain on the engine (using too high a gear). • The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may be rated for trailers heavier than the vehicle is designed to tow. Please adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer weights. 06 • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines exceeding 15%.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 159 06 Starting and driving

Detachable trailer hitch

Installing the ball holder 4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch assembly/ball holder. 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end of the locking bolt.

Removing the ball holder 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the ball holder/hitch assembly. 2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assem- bly.

NOTE G030864 A cover for the hitch assembly is also Ball holder included in the kit. Cotter pin

06 Hitch assembly Safety wire attachment Locking bolt 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the hitch assembly. 2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem- bly. 3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one in the hitch assembly.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 160 06 Starting and driving

Transporting loads

Loading the vehicle WARNING Your vehicle's load-carrying capacity is affec- Remember that an object weighing ted by factors such as: • 44 lbs (20 kg) produces a force of • the number of passengers 2,200 lbs (1,000 kg) in a head-on colli- • tire inflation sion at 30 mph (50 km/h)! • the amount of optional or accessory equip- • When the rear backrest(s) are folded ment installed down, the vehicle should not be loaded to a level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below • the amount of cargo. the upper edge of the rear side win- See the chapter "Wheels and tires" for more dows. Objects placed higher than this detailed information. level could impede the function of the Volvo Inflatable Curtain. Before loading the car, turn off the engine, and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. The gear selector can be inadvertently knocked out of position by long cargo, causing the car to move.

Keep the following in mind when loading the vehicle: 06 • Load objects in the trunk against the rear seat backrest. • Load heavy cargo as low as possible. • Center wide loads. • Secure all cargo with restraining straps anchored to the load securing eyelets. • Cover sharp edges on the load.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 161 06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

Introduction WARNING B • BLIS is an information system, NOT a warning or safety system. • BLIS does not eliminate the need for A you to visually confirm the conditions around you, and the need for you to turn your head and shoulders to make sure that you can safely change lanes. • As the driver, you have full responsibility for changing lanes in a safe manner.

The system is based on digital camera tech- nology. The cameras (1) are located beneath G020296 G020295 the side-view mirrors. A = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters), B = approx. 31 ft. (9.5 meters) BLIS camera When one (or both) of the cameras have detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the Indicator light approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of driver if a fault should occur with the system. For example, if one or both of the system's BLIS symbol your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft. 06 (9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), the cameras are obscured, a message (see the The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an indicator light in the door panel (2) illuminates. table on page 165) will appear in the informa- information system that indicates the presence The light will glow continuously to alert the tion display in the instrument panel. If this of another vehicle moving in the same direction driver of the vehicle in the blind area. occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary, as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind the system can be temporarily switched off (for area". NOTE instructions see page 164). The door panel indicator light illuminates on CAUTION the side of the vehicle where the system has The BLIS system should only be repaired by detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- passed on both sides at the same time, both nician. lights will illuminate.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

When does BLIS function Darkness WARNING The system functions when your vehicle is BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding BLIS does not react to cyclists or moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a • vehicle in the blind area must have its head- mopeds. When you pass another vehicle: lights on. This means, for example, that the • BLIS does not react to vehicles that are The system reacts when you pass another system will not detect a trailer without head- standing still. vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h) lights that is being towed behind a car or truck. • The function of the BLIS cameras may faster than that vehicle. be affected by intense light, or when driving at night in areas where there are When you are passed by another vehicle: no external sources of light (e.g., street The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by lights, other vehicles, etc.). In such another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph cases, the system may react as if the (70 km/h) faster than your vehicle. cameras were obscured. • In both of the above mentioned condi- WARNING tions, a message will appear in the infor- mation display. • BLIS does not function in sharp curves. When driving in such conditions, the BLIS does not function when your vehi- • • system's function will be limited or it cle is backing up. may be temporarily switched off, see • If you are towing a wide trailer, this may page 164 for instructions. 06 prevent the BLIS cameras from detect- When the message is no longer dis- ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes. • played, BLIS will return to normal func- tion. How BLIS functions in daylight and • The BLIS cameras have the same limi- darkness tation as the human eye. In other words, Daylight their "vision is impaired" by adverse BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehi- weather conditions such as heavy snowfall, dense fog, etc. cles. The system is designed to help detect motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses, motorcycles, etc.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163 06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

Limitations CAUTION In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s) may illuminate even when there are no other • Clean the lenses carefully to avoid vehicles in the area monitored by the system. scratching. • The lenses are electrically heated to NOTE help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen-

G018177 tly brush away snow from the lenses. If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa- sionally even when there are no other vehi- The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light, cles in the blind area, this does not indicate smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on Switching BLIS on and off a fault in the system. a highway In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst. service required will be displayed.

The following are several examples of situa- tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may illuminate even when there are no other vehi- cles in the area monitored by the system. Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low 06 on the horizon Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera

lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped G018389 clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge. BLIS button (forward button in the illustration)

Light reflected from a wet road surface BLIS is automatically activated when the igni- tion is switched on. The indicator lights will provide confirmation by flashing 3 times. • The system can be switched off by press- ing the BLIS button in the center console. The indicator light in the button goes out

Information Provided by:Provided Information

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

when the system is switched off, and a text message is displayed. • BLIS can be switched on again by pressing the button. The indicator light in the button will illuminate and a new text message will be displayed. Press the READ button, see page 56, to erase the message. BLIS system messages Text in the System status display BLIS service BLIS not functioning required properly. Contact an authorized Volvo serv- ice technician.

BLIS camera BLIS camera obscured. blocked Clean the lenses.

BLIS ON BLIS system on 06 BLIS OFF BLIS system off

BLIS reduced The BLIS cameras' function function has been reduced by e.g., fog, or strong sunlight directly into the camera. The camera will reset itself when these conditions have changed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165 06 Starting and driving

Park assist*

Introduction WARNING NOTE Park Assist is an information system, NOT a Rear park assist is deactivated automati- safety system. This system is designed to cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine be a supplementary aid when parking the trailer wiring is used. vehicle. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judge- ment. Front park assist The distance monitored in front of the vehicle is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible sig- Function nal comes from the audio system's front The system is activated automatically when the speakers. vehicle is started. The indicator light in the but- It may not be possible to combine auxiliary ton in the center console illuminates. headlights and front park assist since these • The front park assist system is active from lights could trigger the system's sensors. the time the engine is started until the vehi- Front/rear park assist cle exceeds a speed of approximately 10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the The park assist system is designed to assist vehicle is backing up. you when driving into parking spaces, garages, • Rear park assist is active when the engine 06 etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors located in one or both bumpers to measure the dis- is running and reverse gear has been selected. tance to a vehicle, object or a person who may be close to the front or rear of your vehicle. Rear park assist Park assist is available in two versions: The distance monitored behind the vehicle is approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The signal comes Rear bumper only • from the rear speakers. • Front and rear bumpers The system must be deactivated when towing a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park assist system's sensors.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Park assist*

Activating/deactivating park assist NOTE Faults in the system If the information symbol illumi- • Front park assist is disengaged auto- nates and PARK ASSIST matically when the parking brake is applied. SERVICE REQUIRED is shown on the information display, this • If the vehicle is equipped with front and indicates that the system is not rear park assist, both systems will be functioning properly and has been disengaged. deactivated by pressing the button. Consult a Volvo retailer or authorized Volvo service technician. Audible signals from the park assist system CAUTION The Park Assist system uses an intermittent In certain circumstances, the park assist tone that pulses faster as you come close to an system may give unexpected warning sig- nals that can be caused by external sound

G018389 object, and becomes constant when you are sources that use the same ultrasound fre- within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object Park Assist button (rear button in the illustration) quencies as the system. This may include in front of or behind the vehicle. If the volume such things as the horns of other vehicles, The system is activated automatically when the of another source from the audio system is wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, vehicle is started. high, this will be automatically lowered. motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does not indicate a fault in the system. Press the Park assist button on the center If there are objects within this distance both 06 console to temporarily deactivate the sys- behind and in front of the vehicle, the signal tem(s). The indicator light in the button will alternates between front and rear speakers. go out when the system has been deacti- vated. Park assist will be automatically reactiva- ted the next time the engine is started, or if the button is pressed (the indicator light in the button will illuminate).

 Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167 06 Starting and driving

Park assist*

Cleaning the sensors G020952

Park assist sensors The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them 06 with water and a suitable car washing deter- gent. Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.

NOTE If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt, snow, or ice, this could result in false warn- ing signals from the park assist system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

06

Information Provided by:Provided Information 169 170 Tire PressureMonitoringSystem (TPMS)...... 190 Tire SealingSystem...... 188 Changing awheel...... 187 Wheel nuts...... 186 Temporary spare...... 185 Snow chains,snowtires,studdedtires...... 184 Uniform tirequalitygradings...... 182 Vehicle loading...... Glossary oftireterminology...... 179 Tire designations...... 178 Inflation pressure—Canadianmodels...... 177 Inflation pressure—U.S.models...... 175 Tire inflation...... 172 General information...... I nf or mat i on Pr ov i ded by : 195 181

G020918 WHEELS AND TIRES 07

Information Provided by:Provided Information 07 Wheels and tires

General information

Introduction of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires You should replace the spare tire when you Your vehicle is equipped with tires according without the "all-season" rating. However, for replace the other road tires due to the aging of to the vehicle's tire information placard on the optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered the spare. roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on B-pillar (the structural member at the side of A tire's age can be determined by the DOT all four wheels. the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration). opening), or on the inside of the fuel filler door When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration on Canadian models. are the same size designation, type (radial) and should be replaced immediately. preferably from the same manufacturer, on all CAUTION four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering Improving tire economy Some Volvo models are equipped with an the car's roadholding and handling characte- • Maintain correct tire pressure. For the tire Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com- ristics. pressure tables, see page 177. bination designed to provide maximum dry New Tires • Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard pavement performance with consideration braking and tire screeching. for hydroplaning resistance. As such, they Remember that tires are per- may be more susceptible to road hazard ishable goods. As of 2000, the • Tire wear increases with speed. damage and, depending on driving condi- manufacturing week and year • Correct front wheel alignment is very tions, may achieve a tread life of less than (Department of Transporta- important. 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehi- tion (DOT) stamp) will be indi- • Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy cle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced cated with 4 digits (e.g. 1502 DSTC system, these tires are not designed and driving comfort. for winter driving, and should be replaced means that the tire illustrated was manufactured during week 15 of 2002). • Tires must maintain the same direction of with winter tires when weather conditions rotation throughout their lifetime. dictate. Tire age • When replacing tires, the tires with the Tires degrade over time, even when they are most tread should be mounted on the rear 07 The tires have good road holding characteris- not being used. It is recommended that tires wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer tics and offer good handling on dry and wet generally be replaced after 6 years of normal during hard braking. surfaces. It should be noted however that the service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the tires have been developed to give these fea- • high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V) tires and/or wheels permanently. tures on snow/ice-free surfaces. exposure can accelerate the aging process. Certain models are equipped with "all-season" tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree

Information Provided by:Provided Information 172 07 Wheels and tires

General information

Summer and winter tires • Contact a Volvo workshop if you are WARNING unsure about the tread depth. • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo Storing wheels and tires are specified to meet stringent stability When storing complete wheels (tires mounted and handling requirements. Unap- on rims), they should be suspended off the proved wheel/tire size combinations floor or placed on their sides on the floor. can negatively affect your vehicle's sta- bility and handling. Approved tire sizes Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on are shown in the Tire inflation pressure their sides or standing upright, but should not tables, see page 177. be suspended. • Any damage caused by installation of unapproved wheel/tire size combina- CAUTION tions will not be covered by your new Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no dry, dark place, and should never be stored responsibility for death, injury, or G020325 in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, expenses that may result from such The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the etc. installations. tire • When switching between summer and winter tires, mark the tires to indicate Tire wear where they were mounted on the car, e.g., Tire rotation LF = left front, RR = right rear Tire wear is affected by a number of factors • Tires with tread designed to roll in only one such as tire inflation, ambient temperature, direction are marked with an arrow on the driving style, etc. Your vehicle is driven mainly sidewall. by the front tires, which will wear faster. 07 Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's • If the tires are rotated, they should only be braking properties and ability to force aside rain, snow and slush. moved from front to back or vice versa. They should never be rotated left to right/right to left. • The tires with the most tread should always be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid- However, tire rotation, done at the recom- ding). mended intervals, is one way of helping to keep

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 173 07 Wheels and tires

General information

tread wear as even as possible and will help Tread wear indicator you get maximum mileage from your tires. Ideally, tire rotation should be done the first time after approximately 3,000 miles (5, 000 km) and thereafter at 6,000 mile (10,000 km) intervals. Tire rotation should only be performed if front/ rear tire wear is fairly even and tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

NOTE Tire rotation is not included in regularly scheduled maintenance and is performed only at customer request, at additional G020323 charge. The tires have wear indicator strips running Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidance across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI based on your particular driving circumstan- are printed on the side of the tire. When ces. approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the tread, these strips become visible and indicate that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac- tion. 07 When replacing worn tires, it is recommended that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the same make (manufacturer) will prevent altera- tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 174 07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

Inflation labels Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns.

WARNING • Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failure and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation, or "blowout," with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. • Under-inflated tires reduce the load car- rying capacity of your vehicle. G032520

G032513 When weather temperature changes occur, tire Tire inflation placard on Canadian models inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree Tire inflation placard on U.S. models temperature drop causes a corresponding NOTE Check tire inflation pressure regularly. drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check The placards shown indicate inflation pres- your tire pressures frequently and adjust them Tables listing the recommended inflation pres- sure for the tires installed on the car at the to the proper pressure, which can be found on sure for your vehicle can be found on page factory only. the vehicle's tire information placard or certifi- 177. A tire inflation pressure placard is also cation label. located on the driver's side B-pillar (the struc- Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pres- tural member at the side of the vehicle, at the sure, including the spare, at least once a month rear of the driver's door opening). This placard and before long trips. You are strongly urged 07 indicates the designation of the factory-moun- to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as auto- ted tires on your vehicle, as well as load limits matic service station gauges may be inaccu- and inflation pressure. rate. Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 175 07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

Checking tire pressure 2. Add air to reach the recommended air 99 = 1709 lbs (755 kg). pressure Cold tires Speed ratings Inflation pressure should be checked when the 3. Replace the valve cap. The speed ratings in the tables translate as fol- tires are cold. 4. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ- lows: The tires are considered to be cold when ing the spare. M = 81 mph (130 km/h), they have the same temperature as the sur- 5. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there V = 149 mph (240 km/h), rounding (ambient) air. are no nails or other objects embedded W = 168 mph (270 km/h). This temperature is normally reached after the that could puncture the tire and cause an car has been parked for at least 3 hours. air leak. See also page 179 for an explanation of the designations on the sidewall of the tire. After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile 6. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular- you have to drive farther than this distance to ities. pump your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pres- NOTE sure when you get to the pump. • If you overfill the tire, release air by If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, pushing on the metal stem in the center never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires of the valve. Then recheck the pressure are hot from driving and it is normal for pres- with your tire gauge. sures to increase above recommended cold • Some spare tires require higher inflation pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended pressure than the other tires. Consult cold inflation pressure could be significantly the tire inflation tables, see page 177, or see the inflation pressure placard. 07 under-inflated. To check inflation pressure: Load ratings 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, The load ratings in the tables above translate then firmly press the tire gauge onto the as follows: valve. 91 = 1365 lbs (615 kg), 93 = 1433 lbs (650 kg),

Information Provided by:Provided Information 176 07 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure—U.S. models

Tire inflation pressure table tion placard for information specific to the tires The following tire pressures are recommended installed on your vehicle at the factory. by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-

Tire size Cold tire pressure up to four persons psi (kPa) Front Rear 235/45R17 94V M+S 36 (250) 36 (250)

235/40R18 91Y 36 (250) 36 (250) Extra Load M+S

Temporary spare tire 61 (420) 61 (420) T125/85R16 99M

07

Information Provided by:Provided Information 177 07 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure—Canadian models

Tire inflation pressure table tion placard for information specific to the tires The following tire pressures are recommended installed on your vehicle at the factory. by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-

Tire size Cold tire pressures Optional pressure Up to four persons Up to three personsA psi (kPa) psi (kPa) Front Rear Front Rear 235/45 R17 94V M+S 36 (250) 36 (250) 30 (210) 30 (210)

235/40 R18 91Y 36 (250) 36 (250) 32 (220) 32 (220)

Temporary spare tire 61 (420) 61 (420) 61 (420) 61 (420) T125/85R16 99M

A Optional pressure may not be used for homologation of fuel consumption or emissions.

07

Information Provided by:Provided Information 178 07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

Tire designations 215: The width of the tire (in millimeters) M+S or M/ from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The S = Mud and Snow, AT = All Terrain, AS = 7 9 larger the number, the wider the tire. All Season 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" R: Radial tire. 6 8 and indicates that the tire meets all federal 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in standards. The next two numbers or letters 5 10 inches). are the plant code where it was manufac- 4 tured, the next two are the tire size code 11 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a and the last four numbers represent the load index of 95 equals a maximum load of 3 12 week and year the tire was built. For exam- 1521 lbs (690 kg). 2 ple, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum The numbers in between are marketing 1 speed at which the tire is designed to be codes used at the manufacturer's discre-

G026442 driven for extended periods of time, carry- tion. This information helps a tire manufac- ing a permissible load for the vehicle, and turer identify a tire for safety recall purpo- Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers with correct inflation pressure. For exam- ses. ple, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph place standardized information on the sidewall Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: (210 km/h). of all tires (see the illustration). Indicates the number of plies indicates or The following information is listed on the tire the number of layers of rubber-coated fab- sidewall: NOTE ric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire man- ufacturers also must indicate the ply mate- The tire designation: This information may not appear on the tire because it is not required by law. rials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. NOTE 07 Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum Please be aware that the following tire des- load in pounds and kilograms that can be ignation is an example only and that this carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire particular tire may not be available on your information placard located on the B-Pillar vehicle. or the driver's door for the correct tire pres- sure for your vehicle.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 179 07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature grades: See page 184 for more informa- tion. Maximum permissible inflation pres- sure: The greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer. The tire suppliers may have additional mark- ings, notes or warnings such as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.

07

Information Provided by:Provided Information 180 07 Wheels and tires

Glossary of tire terminology

Terminology • B-pillar: The structural member at the side B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this • Tire information placard: A placard of the vehicle behind the front door. chapter. showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be sizes, recommended inflation pressure, to the rim. cold when they have the same temperature and the maximum weight the vehicle can • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem- carry. bead area and the tread. perature is normally reached after the car has been parked for at least 3 hours. • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num- • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim- ber on the sidewall of each tire providing eter of the tire that contacts the road when Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi- information about the tire brand and man- mounted on the vehicle. mum return of vehicle design performance. ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man- ufacturer. • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the • Inflation pressure: A measure of the tire beads are seated. amount of air in a tire. • Maximum load rating: a figure indicating • Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met- the maximum load in pounds and kilo- ric tires designed to carry a maximum load grams that can be carried by the tire. This at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. rating is established by the tire manufac- Increasing the inflation pressure beyond turer. this pressure will not increase the tires load carrying capability. • Maximum permissible inflation pres- sure: the greatest amount of air pressure • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric that should ever be put in the tire. This limit tires designed to carry a heavier maximum is set by the tire manufacturer. load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure • Recommended tire inflation pressure: inflation pressure, established by Volvo, beyond this pressure will not increase the 07 tires load carrying capability. which is based on the type of tires that are mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres- inflation pressure is affected by the number sure. of occupants in the car, the amount of • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard cargo, and the speed at which the vehicle unit of air pressure. will be driven for a prolonged period. This information can be found on the tire infla- tion placard(s) located on the driver's side

Information Provided by:Provided Information 181 07 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

Loading the vehicle Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must and passengers from XXX kilograms or with the following terms for determining your never exceed its maximum permissible weight. XXX pounds. vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 4. The resulting figure equals the available trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen- amount of cargo and luggage load Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ gers. capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa- equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five tion placard: 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the NOTE amount of available cargo and luggage Curb weight • The location of the various labels in your load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5×150) The weight of the vehicle including a full tank vehicle can be found on page 264. = 650 lbs.) of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equip- • A table listing important weight limits for 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage your vehicle can be found on page ment. and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. 267. That weight may not safely exceed the Capacity weight available cargo and luggage load capacity All weight added to the curb weight, including calculated in Step 4. cargo and optional equipment. When towing, Steps for Determining Correct Load 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo Limit 1. Locate the statement "the combined from your trailer will be transferred to your weight. 1 weight of occupants and cargo should vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and NOTE never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi- cle's placard. luggage load capacity of your vehicle. For trailer towing information, please refer to the section "Towing a trailer", see 2. Determine the combined weight of the 07 page 158. driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Permissible axle weight The maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian

1 See "Towing a trailer"

Information Provided by:Provided Information 182 07 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

WARNING • Exceeding the permissible axle weight, gross vehicle weight, or any other weight rating limits can cause tire over- heating resulting in permanent defor- mation or catastrophic failure. • Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the tires that were original equipment on the vehicle because this will lower the vehi- cle's GVW rating. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the vehicle's GVW rating limitations.

07

Information Provided by:Provided Information 183 07 Wheels and tires

Uniform tire quality gradings

Uniform tire quality gradings faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C WARNING ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST may have poor traction performance. The trac- The temperature grade for this tire is estab- CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY tion grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is lished for a tire that is properly inflated and REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE not overloaded. Excessive speed, under- GRADES not a measure of cornering (turning) traction. inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa- rately or in combination, can cause heat Quality grades can be found, where appli- WARNING buildup and tire failure. cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum section width. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is example: based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a measure of cornering Treadwear 200 Traction AA (turning) traction. Temperature A TEMPERATURE TREADWEAR The temperature grades are AA (the highest), The treadwear grade is a comparative rating A, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance based on the wear rate of the tire when tested to the generation of heat and its ability to dis- under controlled conditions on a specified gov- sipate heat when tested under controlled con- ernment test course. For example, a tire gra- ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2) wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause times as well on the government course as a the material of the tire to degenerate and tire graded 100. The relative performance of reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can tires depends upon the actual conditions of lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre- their use, however, and many depart signifi- sponds to a minimum level of performance that cantly from the norm due to variation in driving 07 all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the habits, maintenance practices and differences Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. in road characteristics and climate. Grades B and A represent higher levels of per- TRACTION formance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur-

Information Provided by:Provided Information 184 07 Wheels and tires

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

Snow chains CAUTION ure to do so could reduce traction to an Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with unsafe level or adversely affect handling. Check local regulations regarding the the following restrictions: • Do not mix tires of different design as this use of snow chains before installing. • could also negatively affect overall tire road Snow chains should be installed on front • • Always follow the chain manufacturer's grip. wheels only. Use only Volvo approved installation instructions carefully. Install Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads snow chains. chains as tightly as possible and • in warm weather. They should be removed If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires retighten periodically. • when the winter driving season has ended. and wheels are installed and are of a size Never exceed the chain manufacturer's • Studded tires should be run-in different than the original tires and wheels, specified maximum speed limit. (Under • 300–600 miles (500–1000 km) during chains in some cases CANNOT be used. no circumstances should you exceed which the car should be driven as smoothly Sufficient clearances between chains and 31 mph (50 km/h). brakes, suspension and body components as possible to give the studs the opportu- must be maintained. • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns nity to seat properly in the tires. The tires when driving with snow chains. should have the same rotational direction Some strap-on type chains will interfere • throughout their entire lifetime. with brake components and therefore • The handling of the vehicle can be CANNOT be used. adversely affected when driving with chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well NOTE Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow as locked wheel braking. chain information. Please consult state or provincial regula- tions restricting the use of studded winter tires before installing such tires. Snow tires, studded tires Tires for winter use: • Owners who live in or regularly commute through areas with sustained periods of 07 snow or icy driving conditions are strongly advised to fit suitable winter tires to help retain the highest degree of traction. • It is important to install winter tires on all four wheels to help retain traction during cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-

Information Provided by:Provided Information 185 07 Wheels and tires

Temporary spare

Temporary spare The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a "Tem- porary Spare". Recommended tire pressure (see the placard on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should be maintained irrespective of which position on the car the temporary spare tire is used. In the event of damage to this tire, a new one can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING Current legislation prohibits the use of the "Temporary Spare" tire other than as a tem- porary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire. Road holding and handling may be affected with the "Temporary Spare" in use. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) with the "Temporary Spare" in use.

CAUTION 07 The car must not be driven with wheels of different dimensions or with a spare tire other than the one that came with the car. The use of different size wheels can seri- ously damage your car's transmission.

1 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 186 07 Wheels and tires

Wheel nuts

Wheel nuts WARNING Never use the short type of nut for alumi- nium wheels. This could cause the wheel to come loose.

Aluminum wheels – high nut Only the high type of nut can be used for alu- minum wheels. This is considerably different from other types of nut because it has a rotat- ing conical thrust washer.

NOTE This nut can also be used on steel wheels. G020324

Low nut. Lockable wheel nut If steel wheels with lockable wheel nuts are High nut. used in combination with wheel covers, the There are two different types of wheel nut, lockable wheel nut must be fitted to the stud depending on whether the wheels are steel or nearest the air valve. The wheel cover cannot aluminum. otherwise be installed on the wheel.

Steel rims – low nut Steel rims are normally secured using the low 07 type of nut, although steel rims may also use the high type.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 187 07 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

Changing a wheel G020332

G020331 Jack attachment points 5. With the car still on the ground, use the lug The spare tire, jack, and crank are located wrench to loosen the wheel nuts 1/2–1 turn 7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be under the carpet on the floor of the trunk. by exerting downward pressure. Turn the changed is lifted off the ground. nuts counterclockwise to loosen. To change a tire: 8. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and 6. There are two jack attachment points on carefully remove the wheel so as not to 1. Apply the parking brake. each side of the car. Position the jack cor- damage the threads on the studs. 2. Put the gear selector in Park (P) or reverse rectly in the attachment (see the illustration) on models with a manual transmission. and crank while simultaneously guiding the base of the jack to the ground. The base of 07 3. Block the wheels that are on the ground the jack must be flat on a level, firm, non- with wooden blocks or large stones. slippery surface. Before raising the car, 4. Remove the wheel cover (where applica- check that the jack is still correctly posi- ble) using the lug wrench in the tool bag. tioned in the attachment.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 188 07 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

WARNING Installing the wheel WARNING 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel The jack must correctly engage the jack The jack and any tools should always be • and hub. attachment. returned to their proper storage compart- 2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub. ments after use to help keep them securely • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- in place in the event of sudden braking, etc. slippery surface. 3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand- • Never allow any part of your body to be tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross- extended under a car supported by a wise until all nuts are snug. jack. 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter- • Use the jack intended for the car when nately tighten the bolts crosswise to changing a tire. For any other job, use 81 ft. lbs. (110 Nm). stands to support the car. 5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable). • Apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in the Park (P) position or reverse on models with a manual trans- Returning the jack to its storage space mission. The jack (certain models) and tools should be • Block the wheels standing on the returned to their correct storage places after ground, use rigid wooden blocks or use. large stones. • On vehicles equipped with a jack and • The jack should be kept well-greased spare wheel, the jack should be cranked and clean, and should not be damaged. down and returned to its storage position • No objects should be placed between after use. the base of jack and the ground, or • On vehicles equipped with the tire sealing between the jack and the attachment system, the jack should be cranked down 07 bar on the vehicle. as far as possible and returned to its stor- age position in the foam block.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 189 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Introduction NOTE Tire sealing system–overview Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing The tire sealing system is only intended system* that enables you to temporarily seal a • to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire, the sidewall. or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure. • Tires with large holes or tears cannot be The system consists of an air compressor, a repaired with the tire sealing system. container for the sealing compound, wiring to • After use, stow the tire sealing system connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical properly to help prevent rattling. system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a hose used to connect the system to the tire’s inflation valve. WARNING The 12-volt socket is located in the front tunnel • After using the tire sealing system, the console. vehicle should not be driven farther than

approximately 120 miles (200 km). G020400 Accessing the tire sealing system Have the tire inspected by a trained and The tire sealing system is stowed in the com- • qualified Volvo service technician as Speed limit sticker partment in the rear side of the ski hatch in the soon as possible to determine if it can On/Off switch center of the rear seat backrest. See page be permanently repaired or must be 115 for information on opening this hatch. replaced. Electrical wire 1. Lift the floor hatch in the trunk. • The vehicle should not be driven faster Bottle holder (orange cover) 2. Lift out the tire sealing system. than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire that has been temporarily repaired with Protective hose cover the tire sealing system. 07 Air release knob • After using the tire sealing system, drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering Hose maneuvers and sudden stops. Bottle with sealing compound Air pressure gauge

Information Provided by:Provided Information

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

WARNING • Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air. NOTE If irritation persists, get medical atten- Please keep the following points in mind tion. Do not remove any foreign objects (nails, when using the tire sealing system: etc.) from the tire before using the sealing system. • The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in the illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanol Tire sealing system–temporarily and natural rubber-latex. These sub- repairing a flat tire • Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is stances are harmful if swallowed. checked and adjusted if necessary. • The contents of this bottle may cause allergic skin reactions or otherwise be WARNING potentially harmful to the skin, the cen- • Never leave the tire sealing system tral nervous system, and the eyes. unattended when it is operating. Precautions: • Keep the tire sealing system away from • Keep out of reach of children. children. • Do not ingest the contents. • Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off • Avoid prolonged or repeated contact the road and away from moving traffic. with the skin. • Apply the parking brake. • Hands should be washed thoroughly after handling. Stage 1: Sealing the hole G019723 First aid: 1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit. • Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two 2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it soap and water. Get medical attention stages: to the steering wheel hub where it will be if symptoms occur. clearly visible to the driver. 07 • Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least sealing compound into the tire. The car is 3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi- 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the then driven a short distance to distribute tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be upper and lower eyelids. Get medical the sealing compound in the tire. pressed down). attention if symptoms occur.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 191 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

4. Put on the gloves included in the tire seal- 7. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla- NOTE ing system. tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys- tem’s hose connector onto the valve as The air pressure gauge will temporarily tightly as possible by hand. show an increase in pressure to approxi- WARNING mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com- Contact with the sealing compound may 8. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest pound is being pumped into the tire. The cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash 12-volt socket in the vehicle. pressure should return to a normal level the affected area immediately with soap and after approximately 30 seconds. water. 9. Start the vehicle’s engine. 10. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor 11. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to 5. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle by pressing the on/off switch to position I. between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle off the compressor briefly to get a clear of sealing compound. WARNING reading from the pressure gauge. The compressor should not be used for more Never stand next to the tire being inflated • than 10 minutes at a time to avoid over- NOTE when the compressor is in operation. heating. Do not break the seal on the bottle. This • If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire, occurs automatically when the bottle is switch off the compressor immediately. screwed into the holder. CAUTION • If there is visible damage to the sidewall or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. The compressor should not be used for 6. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder. The vehicle should not be driven if this more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating. occurs. Contact a towing service or WARNING Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if applicable. The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep WARNING 07 it securely in place and help prevent sealing If the pressure remains below 22 psi compound leakage. Once in place, the bot- (1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes, tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done turn off the compressor. In this case, the by a trained and qualified Volvo service hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle technician. should not be driven.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 192 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

12. Switch off the compressor and disconnect WARNING Replacing the sealing compound the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket. container If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering 13. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation behavior, or noises should occur while driv- The sealing compound container must be valve and reinstall the valve cap. ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a replaced if: safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps, 14. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi- • the tire sealing system has been used to cracks, or other visible damage, and repair a tire mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal- is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue • the container’s expiration date has passed ing compound in the tire. driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained (see the date on decal). and qualified Volvo service technician. CAUTION NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure • After use, the sealing compound bottle, Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the 1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri- the hose, and certain other system use of the sealing compound may lead to bed in stage 1. components must be replaced. Please incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare 2. Refer to the inflation pressure tables for the consult your Volvo retailer for replace- cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor. ment parts. Use the tire sealing system to check and correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure. to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s • If the sealing compound bottle’s expi- compressor. If necessary, release air from ration date has passed, please take it to the tire by turning the air release knob a Volvo retailer or a recycling station NOTE counterclockwise. that can properly dispose of harmful substances. • Safely stow the tire sealing system in a convenient place as it will soon be used CAUTION again to check the tire’s inflation pres- The compressor should not be used for sure. more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid 07 • The empty bottle of sealing compound overheating. cannot be removed from the bottle holder. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to have the WARNING bottle removed and properly disposed If you interrupt your trip for more than 1 of. hour, check the inflation pressure in the damaged tire again before continuing.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 193 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Inflating tires 7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the The tire sealing system can be used to inflate gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to the tires. To do so: get a clear reading from the pressure gauge. 1. Park the car in a safe place. 8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the cor- 2. The compressor should be switched off. rect inflation pressure. If the tire needs to Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi- be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be compressor (press the on/off switch to pressed down). position I). If necessary, release air from the 3. Take out the electrical wire and hose. tire by turning the air release knob coun- terclockwise. 4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla- tion valve and screw the hose connector onto the valve as tightly as possible by CAUTION hand. The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid 5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest overheating. 12-volt socket in the vehicle. 6. Start the vehicle’s engine. 9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off switch to position 0) when the correct infla- WARNING tion pressure has been reached. • The vehicle’s engine should be running 10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation when the tire sealing system is used to valve and reinstall the valve cap. avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure 07 the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated 11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the place, or outdoors, before using the sys- 12-volt socket. tem. • Children should never be left unattended in the vehicle when the engine is running.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 194 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Introduction NOTE er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- The tire pressure monitoring system uses sen- sure, even if under-inflation has not reached If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla- the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low warning light will flash for approximately tire pressure telltale. tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov- 1 minute and TIRE PRESS SYST ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when inflation pressure data to a receiver located in Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the system is not operating properly. The the vehicle. should be checked monthly when cold and TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with inflated to the inflation pressure recommended the low tire pressure telltale . When the system NOTE by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002 placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will This device complies with part 15 of the vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol- long as the malfunction exists. When the mal- lowing conditions: (1) This device may not pressure label, you should determine the cause harmful interference, and (2) this proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) function indicator is illuminated, the system device must accept any interference may not be able to detect or signal low tire received, including interference that may As an added safety feature, your vehicle has pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may cause undesired operation. been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring occur for a variety of reasons, including the system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- installation of replacement or alternate tires or sure telltale when one or more of your tires is When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when from functioning properly. Always check the will light up the tire pressure warning light the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one (also referred to as a telltale) in the instrument should stop and check your tires as soon as or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to panel and will display one of the following mes- possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- ensure that the replacement or alternate tires 07 sages in the text window: LOW TIRE PRESS. sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to CHECK TIRES or VERY LOW TIRE tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to function properly. PRESSURE. tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 195 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

NOTE will erase the warning text and the warning Volvo does not recommend moving sen- light will go out. sors back and forth between sets of • TPMS indicates low tire pressure but wheels. does not replace normal tire mainte- WARNING nance. For information on correct tire NOTE pressure, please refer to the tables Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire beginning on page 177, or consult your failure, resulting in a loss of control of the • If you change to tires with a different Volvo retailer. vehicle. recommended inflation pressure, the • The tire pressure warning light will not TPMS system must be recalibrated to identify which tire is underinflated. Be Changing wheels with TPMS these tires. This must be done by an authorized Volvo retailer or workshop. sure to check all four tires. Please note the following when changing or • A certain amount of air seepage from replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/ • If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen- the tires occurs naturally and tire pres- tires on the vehicle: sor is moved to another wheel, the sen- sure fluctuates with seasonal changes sor's seal, nut, and valve core should be • Only the factory-mounted wheels are replaced. in temperature. Always check tire pres- equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves. sure regularly. • When installing TPMS sensors, the • If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary vehicle must be parked for at least spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS 15 minutes with the ignition off. If the Erasing warning messages sensor. vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a When a low tire pressure warning message has • If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun- TPMS error message will be displayed. been displayed, and the tire pressure warning ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST light has come on: SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed CAUTION 1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the each time the vehicle is driven above inflation pressure of all four tires. 25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more. When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the 07 2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure • Once TPMS sensors are properly installed, the warning message should not reappear. valve to help avoid bending or otherwise (consult the tire pressure placard or the If the message is still displayed, drive the damaging the valve. tables, see page 177 ). vehicle for several minutes at a speed of 3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the drive the vehicle for several minutes at a message. speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This • Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 196 07 Wheels and tires

07

Information Provided by:Provided Information 197 198 an oc p...... 204 Paint touchup...... 200 Washing andcleaningthecar...... I nf or mat i on Pr ov i ded by :

G020920 CAR CARE 08

Information Provided by:Provided Information 08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the car

Washing the car considerably and also helps prolong the CAUTION The following points should be kept in mind service life of the wiper blades. Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub- when washing and cleaning the car: Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel • • ber components housings, fenders, etc). • The car should be washed at regular inter- Polishing chromed strips can wear In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre- • vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots • away or damage the surface adhere to the paint and may cause dam- quent washing is recommended. age. To help prevent corrosion, it is partic- • Polishes containing abrasive sub- ularly important to wash the car frequently NOTE stances should not be used in the wintertime when salt has been used When washing the car, remember to remove on the roads. dirt from the drain holes in the doors and CAUTION • Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight. sills. Doing so may cause detergents and wax • During high pressure washing, the to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid spray mouthpiece must never be closer scratching, use lukewarm water to soften Exterior components to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not the dirt before you wash with a soft Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning spray into the locks. sponge, and plenty of sudsy water. products, available at your Volvo retailer, for • Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental reduce lighting capacity considerably. • Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork components such as chromed strips on the as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish Clean the headlights regularly, for exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for may be permanently damaged. example when refueling. using these products should be followed care- • • A detergent can be used to facilitate the fully. Solvents or stain removers should not be softening of dirt and oil. used. • Dry the car with a clean chamois and Automatic washing – simple and quick remember to clean the drain holes in the We do NOT recommend washing your car in an doors and rocker panels. automatic wash during the first six months • Tar spots can be removed with tar remover (because the paint will not have hardened suf- after the car has been washed. ficiently). • A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy An automatic wash is a simple and quick way 08 water can be used to clean the wiper to clean your car, but it is worth remembering blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind- that it may not be as thorough as when you shield and wiper blades improves visibility yourself go over the car with sponge and water.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 200 08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the car

Keeping the underbody clean is most impor- Exterior lighting CAUTION tant, especially in the winter. Some automatic Condensation may form temporarily on the washers do not have facilities for washing the inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as Volvo does not recommend the use of long- underbody. life or durable paint protection coatings, headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor- some of which may claim to prevent pitting, mal and the lights are designed to withstand fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have CAUTION moisture. Normally, condensation will dissi- not been tested by Volvo for compatibility pate after the lights have been on for a short with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them Before driving into an automatic car • time. may cause the clear coat to soften, crack, wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to or cloud. Damage caused by application of avoid damaging the windshield wipers. Polishing and Waxing paint protection coatings may not be cov- • Make sure that side view mirrors, auxil- • Normally, polishing is not required during ered under your vehicle's paint warranty. iary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any the first year after delivery, however, wax- antenna(s) are retracted or removed. ing may be beneficial. Upholstery care Otherwise there is risk of the machine • Before applying polish or wax the vehicle dislodging them must be washed and dried. Tar spots can Fabric • Chromed wheels: Clean chrome- be removed with kerosene or tar remover. Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For plated wheels using the same deter- Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, gents used for the body of the vehicle. compound. shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can • After polishing use liquid or paste wax. stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer. permanently stain chrome-plated wheels. • Several commercially available products contain both polish and wax. Interior plastic components Cleaning interior plastic components should Waxing alone does not substitute for pol- • be done with a cleaning agent specially WARNING ishing a dull surface. designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo • When the car is driven immediately after • A wide range of polymer-based waxes can retailer. being washed, apply the brakes several be purchased today. These waxes are easy times in order to remove any moisture to use and produce a long-lasting, high- Alcantera™ suede-like material from the brake linings. gloss finish that protects the bodywork Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a against oxidation, road dirt and fading. soft cloth and mild soap solution. • Engine cleaning agents should not be 08 used when the engine is warm. This • Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct constitutes a fire risk. sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 201 08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the car

Leather care 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the CAUTION Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time, do not rub. • Under no circumstances should gaso- sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents 4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a be used on the plastic or the leather protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and towel, and allow the leather to dry com- since these can cause damage. fading can result. pletely. • Take extra care when removing stains Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy Protecting leather upholstery such as ink or lipstick since the coloring leather care kit formulated to clean and beau- 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on can spread. tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol- protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner • to the upholstery with light circular move- vent can damage the seat padding. removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream ments. protectant restores a barrier against soil and • Start from the outside of the stain and sunlight. 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes. work toward the center. Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a Volvo also offers a special leather softener that This will help the leather resist staining and • pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing should be applied after the cleaner and pro- protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays. may damage the textile upholstery. tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and reduces friction between leather and other fin- • Clothing that is not colorfast, such as ishes in the vehicle. new jeans or suede garments, may stain the upholstery. Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about Cleaning the seat belts Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft- Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild ener 943 7429. soap solution. Cleaning leather upholstery 1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge and squeeze it until the cleaner foams. 08 2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the sponge with circular movements.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 202 08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the car

Cleaning floor mats The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed clean regularly, especially during winter when they should be taken out for drying. Spots on textile mats can be removed with a mild deter- gent. For best protection in winter, Volvo rec- ommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats. Consult your Volvo retailer.

08

Information Provided by:Provided Information 203 08 Car care

Paint touch up

Touching up minor paint damage Minor stone chips and scratches NOTE Paint damage requires immediate attention to Material: When touching up the vehicle, it should be avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish • Primer – can clean and dry. The surface temperature regularly - when washing the vehicle for should be above 60° F (15° C). instance. Touch-up if necessary. • Paint – touch-up pen Brush If the stone chip has not penetrated down Paint repairs require special equipment and • to the metal and an undamaged layer of skill. Contact a trained and authorized Volvo • Masking tape paint remains, the touch-up paint can be service technician for any extensive damage. applied as soon as the spot has been Minor scratches can be repaired by using cleaned. Volvo touch-up paint. Deep scratches Color code 1. Place a strip of masking tape over the dam- aged surface. Pull the tape off so that any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. 2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a small brush. When the primer surface is dry, the paint can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats and let dry after each applica-

G020345 tion. 3. If there is a longer scratch, you may want to protect surrounding paint by masking it off. G031024

08 When ordering touch-up paint from your Volvo retailer, make sure you have the right color. Use the paint code indicated on the model plate (1 in the illustration).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 204 08 Car care

08

Information Provided by:Provided Information 205 206 ue...... 228 Fuses...... 221 Replacing bulbs...... 219 Battery...... 218 Wiper blades...... 216 Fluids...... 214 Engine oil...... 213 Engine compartment...... 212 Hood...... 210 Maintaining yourcar...... 208 Volvo maintenance...... I nf or mat i on Pr ov i ded by :

G020922 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 09

Information Provided by:Provided Information 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Volvo maintenance

General Maintenance Service Records Information booklet for Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance Your Volvo passed several major inspections detailed information concerning each of the program outlined in the Warranty and Service before it was delivered to you, in accordance warranties. Records Information booklet. This mainte- with Volvo specifications. The maintenance nance program contains inspections and serv- procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv- Periodic maintenance helps minimize ices necessary for the proper function of your ice Records Information booklet, many of emissions vehicle. The maintenance services contain which will positively affect your vehicle's emis- Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi- several checks that require special tools and sions, should be performed as indicated. It is cle running well. Your Warranty and Service training, and therefore must be performed by a recommended that receipts for vehicle emis- Records Information booklet provides a com- qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top sion maintenance be retained in case ques- prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up condition, specify time-tested and proven tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec- to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle main- Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories. tion and maintenance should also be per- tenance. The schedule includes components formed anytime a malfunction is observed or that affect vehicle emissions. This page The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S suspected. describes some of the emission-related com- The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle ponents. manufacturers to furnish written instructions to Applicable warranties – U.S/Canada the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana- Vehicle Event Data (Black Box) servicing and function of the components that dian regulations, the following list of warranties Your vehicle's driving and safety systems control emissions. These services, which are is provided. employ computers that monitor, and share listed in the "Warranty and Service Records • New Vehicle Limited Warranty with each other, information about your vehi- Information" booklet, are not covered by the • Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty cle's operation. One or more of these comput- warranty. You will be required to pay for labor ers may store what they monitor, either during Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty and material used. • normal vehicle operation or in a crash or near- • Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys- crash event. Stored information may be read tems Limited Warranty and used by: • Emission Design and Defect Warranty • Volvo Car Corporation • Emission Performance Warranty • service and repair facilities These are the federal warranties; other warran- ties are provided as required by state/provin- cial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and

Information Provided by:Provided Information 208 09 Maintenance and servicing

Volvo maintenance 09

• law enforcement or government agencies • others who may assert a legal right to know, or who obtain your consent to know such information.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 209 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Maintaining your car

Owner maintenance As needed: If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the Periodic maintenance requirements and inter- • Wash the car, including the undercarriage, two jack attachments points should be used. vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty to reduce wear that can be caused by a They are specially reinforced to bear the weight and Service Records Information booklet. buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can be of the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placed caused by salt residues. under the front of the engine support frame. The following points can be carried out Clean leaves and twigs from air intake Take care not to damage the splash guard between the normally scheduled maintenance • vents at the base of the windshield, and under the engine. Ensure that the jack is posi- services. from other places where they may collect. tioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it. Each time the car is refueled: Always use axle stands or similar structures. • Check the engine oil level. NOTE If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the • Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, Complete service information for qualified front and rear lift arm pads should be centered headlights, and taillights. technicians is available online for purchase under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com. edge of the sill rail (see illustration). Monthly: • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect Emission inspection readiness the tires for wear. Hoisting the vehicle • Check that engine coolant and other fluid What is an Onboard Diagnostic System levels are between the indicated "min" and (OBD II)? "max" markings. OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass engine management system. It stores diagnos- cleaner and soft paper towels. tic information about your vehicle's emission • Wipe driver information displays with a soft controls. It can light the Check Engine light cloth. (MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A "fault" is a component or system that is not Visually inspect battery terminals for cor- • performing within an expected range. A fault rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter- may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will minal connector, or a battery near the end store a message about any fault. of its useful service life. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for additional information.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 210 09 Maintenance and servicing

Maintaining your car 09

How Do States Use OBD II for Emission your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, Inspections? serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. Many states connect a computer directly to a • If you recently had service for a lit Check vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can Engine light, or if you had service that then read "faults." In some states, this type of required disconnecting the battery, a inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission period of driving is necessary to bring the test. OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high- How Can My Vehicle Fail OBD II Emission way driving is typically needed to allow Inspection? OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec- retailer can provide you with more infor- tion for any of the following reasons. mation on planning a trip. • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with vehicle may fail inspection. your vehicle's maintenance schedule. • If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit, but went out without any action on your part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the inspection practices in your area. • If you had recent service that required dis- connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic information may be incomplete and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not ready may fail inspection. How Can I Prepare for My Next OBD II Emission Inspection? • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or was lit but went out without service, have

Information Provided by:Provided Information 211 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Hood

Opening the hood G031032

To open the hood: 1. Pull the lever located under the left side of the dash to release the hood lock. 2. Lift the hood slightly. 3. Press up the release control located under the front edge of the hood (at the center) up to the right, and lift the hood.

WARNING Check that the hood locks engage properly when closed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 212 09 Maintenance and servicing

Engine compartment 09 G026456

Cooling system expansion tank Relay/fuse box Power steering fluid reservoir (concealed Air cleaner behind the headlight) Dipstick – engine oil WARNING Radiator The cooling fan may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine Cooling fan has been switched off. Washer fluid reservoir Engine oil filler cap Brake/clutch fluid reservoir Battery

Information Provided by:Provided Information 213 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Engine oil

Changing engine oil and oil filter See page 271 for oil specifications. Refer to the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for information on the oil change inter- vals. Volvo recommends Castrol.

NOTE • Volvo does not recommend the use of oil additives. • Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance G020338 G020336 intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult a Location of dipstick and oil filler cap trained and qualified Volvo service tech- CAUTION nician. Checking the oil 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint- • Not checking the oil level regularly can free rag. result in serious engine damage if the oil Checking and adding oil level becomes too low. The oil level should be checked every time the 2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check Oil that is lower than the specified qual- vehicle is refueled. This is especially important the oil level. • ity can damage the engine. during the period up to the first scheduled 3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to Always add oil of the same type and maintenance service the MIN mark, add approximately • viscosity as already used. • The car should be parked on a level surface 1 US quart (1 liter) of oil. when the oil is checked. • Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This 4. Run the engine until it reaches normal could cause an increase in oil consump- • If the engine is warm, wait for at least operating temperature. tion. 10–15 minutes after the engine has been 5. Switch off the engine and wait for at least switched off before checking the oil. 10–15 minutes and recheck the oil level. If necessary, add oil until the level is near the MAX mark.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 214 09 Maintenance and servicing

Engine oil 09

WARNING Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces

NOTE Volvo uses different systems to indicate a low oil level or pressure. Some models have an oil pressure sensor, in which case a warning symbol (see page 53) is used to indicate low oil pressure. Other models have an oil level sensor, in which case the driver is alerted by the warning symbol in the cen- ter of the instrument panel and a text in the information display. Some models use both systems. Contact an authorized Volvo retailer for more information.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 215 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Fluids

Washer fluid Coolant CAUTION • If necessary, top up the cooling system with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze only (a 50/50 mix of water and anti- freeze). • Different types of antifreeze/coolant may not be mixed. • If the cooling system is drained, it should be flushed with clean water or premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled with the correct mixture of water/anti- freeze. • The cooling system must always be

G026425 G020334 kept filled to the correct level, and the level must be between the MIN and Washer fluid reservoir Coolant reservoir MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there The washer fluid reservoir is located in the Normally, the coolant does not need to be can be high local temperatures in the engine compartment and holds approximately changed. If the system must be drained, con- engine which could result in damage. 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters). During cold weather, the sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- Check coolant regularly! reservoir should be filled with windshield nician. • Do not top up with water only. This washer solvent containing antifreeze. reduces the rust-protective and anti- freeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can also cause damage to the cooling system if it should freeze. • Do not use chlorinated tap water in the vehicles cooling system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 216 09 Maintenance and servicing

Fluids 09

WARNING (280 °C), P/N 9437433 Power steering fluid The fluid level is checked at each service inter- Never remove the radiator cap while the Replace: The fluid should be replaced accord- engine is warm. Wait until the vehicle cools. ing to the intervals specified in the Warranty val. and Service Records Information booklet. If it is necessary to top off the coolant when Fluid type: Volvo power steering fluid or equiv- the engine is warm, unscrew the expansion When driving under extremely hard conditions alent. tank cap slowly so that the overpressure (mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to Replace: No fluid change required. dissipates. replace the fluid more often. Consult your Volvo retailer. Always entrust brake fluid changing to a trained and qualified Volvo serv- WARNING Brake fluid ice technician. If a problem should occur in the power steering system or if the vehicle has no elec- WARNING trical current and must be towed, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in mind that greater effort will be required to in the reservoir or if a brake-related turn the steering wheel. message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected. • Dot 4+ should never be mixed with any other type of brake fluid. G020333

Brake fluid reservoir The brake fluid should always be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reser- voir. Check, without removing the cap, that there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir. Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F

Information Provided by:Provided Information 217 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Wiper blades

Replacing windshield wiper blades Keeping the windshield wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs the serv- ice life of the wiper blades. See page 200 for washing instructions. G020330

1. Fold out the wiper arm. 2. Press the button on the wiper blade attach- ment and pull straight out (1), parallel with the wiper arm. 3. Press a new wiper blade (2) until it clicks into place. 4. Ensure the blade is securely attached (3). 5. Fold in the wiper arm. The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than the one on the passenger's side. G020329

Information Provided by:Provided Information 218 09 Maintenance and servicing

Battery 09

Battery maintenance • To help keep the battery in good condition, Battery symbols Driving habits and conditions, climate, the the vehicle should be driven for at least 15 Wear protection goggles number of starts, etc., all affect the service life minutes a week or connected to a charger and function of the battery. In order for your with an automatic charging function. battery to perform satisfactorily, keep the fol- • If the battery is fully discharged a number lowing in mind: of times, this may shorten its service life. Keeping the battery fully charged helps Check the fluid level in each cell in the battery prolong its service life. every 24 months or every 15,0001 miles See owner's manual for The service life of a battery is affected by (24,000 km), whichever is sooner. • factors such as driving conditions and cli- details • Use a screw driver to open the caps or mate. Extreme cold may also further cover and a flashlight to inspect the level. decrease the battery’s starting capacity. • If necessary, add distilled water. The level • Because the battery’s starting capacity should never be above the indicator. decreases with time, it may be necessary • The fluid level should be checked if the to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for Keep away from children battery has been recharged. an extended period of time or if the vehicle is usually only driven short distances. • After inspection, be sure the cap over each battery cell or the cover is securely in • place. • Check that the battery cables are correctly WARNING connected and properly tightened. PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Corrosive • Never disconnect the battery when the Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- engine is running, or when the key is in the sories contain lead and lead compounds, ignition. This could damage the vehicle's chemicals known to the state of California electrical system. to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. • The battery should be disconnected from the vehicle when a battery charger is used directly on the battery.

1 More frequently in warm climates.  Information Provided by:Provided Information 219 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Battery

No smoking, no open flames, 7. Release the clamp holding the battery. no sparks 8. Lift out the battery.

Installing a new battery 1. Put the battery in place in the engine com- partment. Explosion 2. Install the battery's retaining clamp. 3. Reinstall the front side of the battery box. 4. Connect the positive cable. 5. Connect the ground cable. 6. Reinstall the cover over the battery.

Battery replacement NOTE Removing the battery Used batteries should be properly disposed 1. Switch off the ignition and remove the key. of at a recycling station or similar facility, or taken to your Volvo retailer. 2. Wait at least 5 minutes after switching off the ignition before disconnecting the bat- tery so that all information in the vehicle's WARNING electrical system can be stored in the con- Never expose the battery to open flame trol modules. • or electric spark. 3. Remove the cover over the battery. • Do not smoke near the battery. 4. Disconnect the battery negative (ground) • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do cable. not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, 5. Disconnect the positive cable. skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con- tact occurs, flush the affected area 6. Remove the front side of the battery box immediately with water. Obtain medical with a screwdriver. help immediately if eyes are affected.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 220 09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs 09

Introduction Removing the headlight housing light, turn signal, and side marker bulbs. To lift Before replacing bulbs in your vehicle, please out the housing: keep the following points in mind: WARNING 1. Remove the key from the ignition and turn • The engine should not be running when the headlight switch to position . NOTE changing bulbs. 2. Open the hood. Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin- • When changing in the headlight hous- gers. Grease and oils from your fingers ing, if the engine has been running just 3. Pull up the headlight housing's retaining vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit prior to replacing bulbs, please be pin. on the reflector, which will damage it. aware that components in the engine 4. Pull out the headlight housing. The optional Dual Xenon headlight bulbs compartment will be hot. contain trace amounts of mercury. These bulbs should always be disposed of by a trained and qualified Volvo service techni- cian.

Certain bulbs should only be replaced by a 4 trained and qualified Volvo service techni- cian: • Courtesylighting • Reading lights • Glove compartment lights • Turn signals and courtesy lights in the side door mirrors • High-mounted brake lights G007612

Dual Xenon headlights, Brake lights G007334 • 5. Disconnect the wiring connector by press- ing down the clip with your thumb while at The entire headlight housing must be lifted out the same time pulling the connector with when replacing the high/low beam, parking your other hand.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 221 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Replacing bulbs

6. Lift out the headlight housing and place it Low beam bulb on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.

CAUTION When disconnecting the connector, pull on the connector itself and not on the wiring.

After the defective bulb has been replaced, reinsert the housing in the reverse order. Check that the retaining pin is correctly inserted.

WARNING G007339

Dual Xenon headlights* – due to the high G020255 Low beam bulb voltage used by these headlights, these Cover with retaining clamps bulbs should only be replaced by a trained Installing a new bulb and qualified Volvo service technician. 1. Open the hood and remove the headlight 1. Insert the new bulb. It can only be installed housing (see page 221 for instructions). in one position. 2. Release the retaining clamps on the cover. 2. Press the retaining spring inward and 3. Release the bulb's retaining spring holding upward and slightly to the right until it the bulb in place by pressing it first to the snaps into place. left and then moving it outward and down- 3. Press the wiring connector onto the bulb. ward. 4. Put the plastic cover in place. 4. Pull out the bulb. 5. Press the retaining clamps back into place. 6. Reinstall the headlight housing (see page 221).

Information Provided by:Provided Information

222 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs 09

High beam bulb WARNING Parking light bulb Dual Xenon headlights* – due to the high voltage used by these headlights, the Dual Xenon bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service techni- cian.

3. Driver's side headlight: Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise. Passenger's side headlight: Turn the bulb holder clockwise. 4. Pull out the bulb holder and replace the bulb. G007338 G007392 5. Reinstall the bulb holder. It can only be Halogen high beam bulb installed in one position. 1. Pull out the bulb holder with a pair of pliers. 1. Open the hood. 6. Reinstall the headlight housing (see The bulb holder should not be pulled out 2. Remove the headlight housing (see page 221). by the wire. page 221). 2. Replace the bulb. 3. Press the bulb holder back into place. It NOTE can only be installed in one position. The halogen high beam bulb has a different socket on vehicles equipped with the optional Dual Xenon headlights. On these models, pull the bulb straight out.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 223 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Replacing bulbs

Turn signal Side marker light Front fog lights* G007393 G007394 G021046

1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and 1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, 1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to remove it. pull it out, and replace the bulb. position 0. 2. Remove the bulb from the holder by press- 2. Reinstall the bulb holder. It can only be 2. Remove the panel around the fog light ing it in and twisting it counterclockwise. installed in one position. housing. 3. Insert a new bulb and reinstall the bulb 3. Unscrew both torx screws in the fog light holder in the headlight housing. housing and remove it. 4. Disconnect the connector from the bulb. 5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and pull it out. 6. Install the new bulb in its seat and turn it clockwise. 7. Reconnect the connector to the bulb.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

224 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs 09

8. Secure the fog light housing with the 4. Press the catches together and pull out the Back-up light screws and press the panel back into bulb holder. place. 5. Replace the defective bulb. NOTE 6. Press the bulb holder into place and rein- If the message indicating a burned out bulb Removing the taillight bulb holder stall the cover. remains in the information display after the bulb has been replaced, consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Location of taillight bulbs High-level brake light These bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. G020963

All bulbs in the taillight cluster can be replaced from the trunk. To access the bulb holders: G020964 1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to Location of taillight bulbs position 0. Brake light (LED)1 2. Remove the covers in the left/right panels Taillight/parking light to access the bulb holders. 3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the Fog light (driver's side only) affected bulb holder. Turn signal

1 The wiring to the LED brake lights is permanently connected to the bulb holder. It should not be removed.  Information Provided by:Provided Information 225 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Replacing bulbs

License plate lighting Footwell lighting Trunk lighting G020965 G020795 G020968

1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to The footwell lighting is located under the dash- 1. Insert a screwdriver and turn it gently to position 0. board on the driver's and passenger's sides. detach the bulb housing. To replace a bulb: 2. Remove the screws with a screw driver. 2. Remove the defective bulb. 1. Insert a screwdriver under the edge of the 3. Detach the lens (bulb housing) carefully. 3. Install a new bulb. lens. Turn the screwdriver gently to detach 4. Replace the defective bulb. the lens. 4. Press the bulb housing back into place. 5. Reinstall the entire bulb housing and screw 2. Remove the defective bulb. it into place. 3. Install a new bulb. 4. Press the lens back into place.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 226 09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs 09

Vanity mirror lighting 6. Press the three lower lugs back into place.

Rear reading light bulbs G020253

1. Insert a screwdriver under the center of the G020969 lower edge of the mirror, turn it, and care- fully pry up the lugs at the edge. 1. Insert a screwdriver and turn it gently to 2. Move the screwdriver under the edge on detach the bulb housing. the left and right-hand sides (near the black 2. Remove the defective bulb. rubber sections) and pry carefully to release the lower edge of the mirror. 3. Install a new bulb. 3. Pry carefully and lift out the entire mirror 4. Press the bulb housing back into place. and the cover. 4. Remove the defective bulb and replace it with a new one. 5. To reinstall the mirror, begin by pressing the three lugs at the upper edge of the mir- ror back into place.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 227 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Fuses

Replacing fuses There are relay/fuse boxes located in the engine compartment and the passenger com- partment. If an electrical component fails to function, this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it. To do so: 1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult to remove, special fuse removal tools are located on the inside of the fuse box cov- ers. 2. From the side, examine the curved metal wire in the fuse to see if it is intact. 3. If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the same color and amperage (written on the fuse). If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical system inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the follow- ing pages. Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle's electrical system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 228 09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses 09

Fuse box in the engine compartment G007446

The fuse box in the engine compartment has positions for 36 fuses. • Fuses 1–18 are relays/circuit breakers and should only be removed or replaced by an authorized Volvo service technician. • Fuses 19–36 may be changed at any time when necessary. Several extra fuses and a fuse removal tool to assist in removing/replacing fuses can be found on the underside of the fuse box cover in the engine compartment.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 229 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Fuses

Fuses in the engine compartment G020250

1. Coolant fan (radiator) 50A 9. Engine functions 30A 15. Power retractable hard top 30A

2. Power steering 80A 10. Climate system blower 40A 16. Feed to audio system 40A

3. Feed to passenger com- 60A 11. Headlight washers 20A 17. Windshield wipers 30A partment fuse box Headlight washers, climate 18. Feed to passenger com- 40A 4. Feed to passenger com- 60A system blower, power partment fuse box partment fuse box retractable hard top, lock- ing storage compartments 19. Not in use 5. Element, climate unit 80A 12. Feed to heated rear window 30A 20. Horn 15A 6. Not in use 13. Starter motor relay 30A 21. Not in use 7. ABS pump 30A 14. Trailer connector (acces- 40A 22. Subwoofer 25A 8. ABS valves 20A sory)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 230 09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses 09

23. Engine control module 10A (ECM)/transmission control module (TCM)

24. Not in use

25. Not in use

26. Ignition switch 15A

27. A/C compressor 10A

28. Not in use

29. Front fog lights* 15A

30. Not in use

31. Not in use

32. Fuel injectors 10A

33. Heated oxygen sensor, vac- 20A uum pump

34. Ignition coils, climate unit 10A pressure sensor

35. Engine sensor valves, A/C 15A relay, relay coil, PTC ele- ment oil trap, canister, mass air meter

36. Engine control module 10A (ECM), throttle sensor

 Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Fuses

Fuse box in the passenger compartment G020601

The fuse box in the passenger compartment is 6. Pull the center pins fully out of the mount- located under the glove compartment. ing clips, secure the upholstery with the mounting clips and press the pins into the To access the fuses: mounting clips again. The mounting clips 1. Remove the upholstery covering the fuse then expand, holding the upholstery in box by first pressing in the center pins in position. the mounting clips approximately 0.5 in (1 cm) with a small screwdriver and then pulling the pins out. 2. Turn both retaining screws (2) counter- clockwise until they release. 3. Fold down the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it toward the seat until it stops. Fold it down completely. The fuse box can be unhooked completely. 4. Replace the blown fuse. 5. Close the fuse box in reverse order.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 232 09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses 09

Fuses in the passenger compartment G020246

- Fuse 37-42, not in use - 47. Interior lighting 5A 54. Park assist*, Dual Xenon 10A headlights* 43. Audio system, Blue- 15A 48. Windshield washers 15A tooth,Volvo Navigation sys- 55. Not in use tem* 49. Supplemental Restrain Sys- 10A tem (SRS), Occupant 56. Volvo Navigation System 10A 44. Supplemental Restrain Sys- 10A Weight Sensor (OWS) remote key module, alarm tem (SRS), engine control siren control module module 50. Not in use 57. On-board diagnostic 15A 45. 12-volt socket in passeng- 15A 51. Fuel filter relay 10A socket, brake light switch er's compartment 52. Transmission control mod- 5A 58. Right high beam, auxiliary 7.5A 46. Lighting – glove compart- 5A ule (TCM), ABS lights relay ment, instrument panel, and 53. Power steering 10A footwells 59. Left high beam 7.5A

 Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 233 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Fuses

60. Heated driver's seat* 15A 76. Not in use

61. Heated passenger's seat* 15A 77. 12-volt socket in trunk, aux- 15A iliary equipment control 62. Not in use module (AEM)

63. Power window – rear pas- 20A 78. Not in use senger's side 79. Back-up lights 5A 64. Volvo Navigation system*, 5A lock indicator lights in door 80. Not in use panels 81. Power window and door 65. Audio system 5A lock – rear driver's side

66. Audio system control mod- 10A 82. Power window – front pas- 25A ule (ICM), climate system senger's side door

67. Not in use 83. Power window and door 25A lock – front driver's side 68. Cruise control 5A door

69. Climate system, rain sen- 5A 84. Power passenger's seat 25A sor*, BLIS button* 85. Power driver's seat 25A 70. Not in use 86. Interior lighting relay, trunk 5A 71. Not in use lighting, power seats 72. Not in use

73. Front ceiling lighting 5A

74. Fuel pump relay 15A

75. Not in use

Information Provided by:Provided Information

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and servicing

09

Information Provided by:Provided Information 235 236 Bluetooth 255 Audio menu...... 251 CD player/CDchanger...... 243 Radio functions...... 238 Audio functions...... ® hands-freeconnection...... 256 ...... I nf or mat i on Pr ov i ded by :

G020924 AUDIO 10

Information Provided by:Provided Information 10 Audio

Audio functions

Audio system controls AUX The AUX (auxiliary) port, located under the cen- 10 ter armrest, can be used to connect for exam- ple, an MP3 player. If the player is being charged through a 12-volt socket while it is connect to the AUX port, sound quality may be impaired. The volume of the external sound source AUX may be different from the volume of the internal sound sources such as the CD player or the radio. If the external sound source's volume is too high, the quality of the sound may be impaired.

G026347 Auxiliary connector This can be prevented by adjusting the external sound source's input volume. VOLUME dial AUX port 1. While playing the radio or a CD, lower the USB connector* AM/FM – select a radio band audio volume to about one-quarter. MODE – select a sound source Selecting a sound source 2. Switch to AUX mode on the audio system Press AM/FM (2) repeatedly to toggle by pressing the MODE button. TUNING dial between FM1, FM2, and AM. 3. Connect the headphone output from your SOUND button Press MODE (3) repeatedly to toggle music player to the AUX input using a cable between the CD player and the optional with a stereo 3.5 mm miniplug at both external sound source AUX, USB or the ends. optional Sirius satellite radio. 4. Set your music player's headphone vol- The currently selected sound source will be ume to three-quarters using the player's shown in the display. volume controls.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Audio

Audio functions

5. Press MENU on the audio system, and Steering wheel keypad USB/iPodŸ connector* navigate to AUX Volume or AUX Input Volume. 10 6. Turn the volume knob to raise or lower the AUX Input Volume until you hear music at a comfortable level. 7. If there is distortion, lower your music play- er's headphone volume until the distortion goes away. 8. Finally, exit the menu and adjust the audio volume to a comfortable level.

Volume

Use the volume dial (1) or the buttons in the G026424 steering wheel keypad to adjust the volume Steering wheel keypad level. The volume level is also adjusted auto- An auxiliary device, such as an iPodŸ, MP3 matically according to the vehicle's speed, see The four buttons on the steering wheel keypad player or a USB flash drive can be connected page 242 for more information on this func- can be used to control the audio system. The to the audio system via the connector in the tion. steering wheel keypad can be used to adjust center console storage compartment. A stand- volume, shift between preset stations and ard cable from an iPodŸ or MP3 player can be change CD tracks. Press one of the two left- routed under the cover to the AUX connector hand buttons briefly to change to the next/pre- in the storage compartment. vious preset radio station, or to go to the next/ previous track on a CD. Press and hold down A sound source must be chosen, depending on these buttons to search within a track on a CD. the device that has been connected: 1. Use to select or . The text Daytime/twilight display MODE iPod USB CONNECT DEVICE will be displayed. In daylight the information is displayed against a light background. In darkness it is displayed 2. Connect the device to the connector in the against a dark background. center console storage compartment (see the illustration).

 Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239 10 Audio

Audio functions

The text LOADING will be displayed while the NOTE iPodŸ system loads the files (folder structure) on the An iPodŸ receives current and its battery is The system supports playback of files in the 10 device. This may take a short time. charged through the connecting cord. How- most common versions of formats such as When information about the files (the folder mp3, wma, and wav. However, there may be ever, if the iPod's battery is completely structure) on the device has been loaded, the versions of these formats that the system drained, it should be recharged before the resulting list includes information on the artist, does not support. iPodŸ is connected to the audio system. genre and song title. The system also supports a number of iPod models produced in 2005 or later. NOTE To navigate in the folder structure, press Ÿ iPodŸ Shuffle is not supported. ENTER and scroll up and down the folders When an iPodŸ is used as a sound source, using the arrow buttons (on the audio system the vehicle's audio system has a menu control panel or on the steering wheel keypad). USB flash drive structure similar to the one in the iPodŸ. See the iPod's manual for detailed information. Press the right arrow button to select a folder. To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is Press the left arrow button to go up a level in advisable to only store music files on the drive. the folder structure. Press ENTER to go down It will take considerably longer for the system For further information, refer to the accessory a level in the folder structure. to index the files on the drive if it contains any- manual USB/iPodŸ Music Interface. thing other than compatible music files. Tracks can be selected in two ways: Sound settings Turn the Tuning knob (no. 4 in the illustra- NOTE Optimal sound reproduction tion on page 243) clockwise or counter- The system supports removable media that clockwise. uses the USB 2.0 standard and the FAT32 The audio system is calibrated for optimal sound reproduction through the use of digital file system and can index up to 500 folders Use the right or left arrow keys on the nav- and a maximum of 64,000 files. The device signal processing. This calibration takes into igation control (no. 5 in the illustration on must have at least 256 Mb of memory. account the speakers, amplifier, cabin acous- page 243) to select the desired track. The tics, the seating position of the listener, etc., for arrow keys on the steering wheel keypad each combination of vehicle and audio system. can also be used in the same way. MP3 player Many MP3 players have a file indexing system There is also dynamic calibration that takes that is not supported by the vehicle's audio into account the setting of the volume control, system. In order to use an MP3 player, the sys- radio reception, and the vehicle's speed. The tem must be set to USB Removable device/ sound settings described in this manual, such Mass Storage Device. as BASS, TREBLE, and EQUALIZER are only

Information Provided by:Provided Information 240 10 Audio

Audio functions intended to enable the user to adapt sound Surround sound 3. Select Surround FM/AM/CD/AUX and reproduction to his/her personal preferences. Surround sound settings are used to press ENTER. 10 1. Press SOUND (5). Press this button balance sound levels throughout the 4. Select Pro logic II, 3-channel stereo or vehicle. Surround settings for the var- repeatedly until you come to the setting G021216 Off and press ENTER. that you wish to change. ious sound sources are made sepa- rately. Equalizer Front/Rear 2. Turn the TUNING dial (4) to make the This function is used to fine-tune the sound desired setting. NOTE level for different frequencies separately. The following settings can be made: • Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is only BASS–set the bass level available on the Premium Sound sys- NOTE tem. TREBLE–set the treble level This function is only available on certain • When listening to FM radio stations, sound systems. BALANCE–set the left/right sound balance Dolby Surround Pro Logic II functions FADER–set the front/rear sound balance best in areas with strong reception. If To adjust the equalizer settings: reception is weak, selecting 2 or 3- SUBWOOFER (accessory)–set the level for channel stereo may provide better 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. the subwoofer (bass speaker) sound quality. 2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and CENTER–make settings for the center speaker press ENTER. The Dolby symbol will be appear in the display SURROUND–make settings for surround 3. Select Equalizer Front/Rear and press when Dolby Pro Logic II is activated. sound ENTER. There are three alternative settings: Subwoofer (accessory) The column in the display indicates the sound Pro Logic II level for the current frequency. To switch the subwoofer on or off: • • 3-channel Adjust the level with the TUNING dial (4), 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. • • Off (normal 2-channel stereo) or use the Up/Down arrows. Additional fre- 2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS and press quencies can be selected with the Right/ ENTER. Activating/deactivating Surround sound Left arrows. 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. 3. Select SUBWOOFER and press ENTER. • Save the settings by pressing ENTER or 2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and exit without saving by pressing EXIT. press ENTER.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 241 10 Audio

Audio functions

Automatic sound control The audio system's volume is adjusted auto- 10 matically according to the speed of the vehicle. There are three settings available, which deter- mine the level of volume compensation: • Low • Medium1 • High To set the automatic sound level: 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. 2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and press ENTER. 3. Select AUTO. VOLUME CONTROL in the menu and press ENTER. 4. Select Low, Medium, or High and press ENTER.

1 Default setting.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 242 10 Audio

Radio functions

Radio function controls EXIT–press to cancel a menu selection or Storing preset stations a selected function Manually storing a station 10 AUTO–search for and store the strongest 1. Tune to the desired station. radio stations in the area in which you are driving 2. Press and hold the preset button under which the station is to be stored. The audio Searching for stations system sound will be interrupted for a few There are two ways to manually tune a radio seconds and STATION STORED will station: appear in the display. Turn the TUNING dial (3) to the desired fre- quency. NOTE Press the left or right arrow key on the A total of 30 stations can be stored; 10 sta- menu navigation control and hold it down. tions each in AM, FM1 and FM2.

G026366 The radio scans slowly in the selected direction and will increase the scanning Automatically storing a station AM/FM1/FM2 selection speed after a few seconds. Release the Pressing AUTO (7) automatically searches for button when the desired frequency and stores up to ten strong AM or FM stations Station preset buttons appears in the display. in a separate memory. If more than ten stations TUNING dial for selecting radio stations The frequency can be fine-tuned by short are found, the ten strongest ones are stored. presses on the left/right arrow keys. This function is especially useful in areas in SCAN which you are not familiar with radio stations or MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL–press their frequencies. the up or down arrow keys to scroll in a To use the AUTO function: menu, or the keys on the left/right sides of the control to search for or change radio 1. Select a waveband using the AM/FM but- stations/CD tracks ton (1). 2. Start the search by pressing AUTO until AUTO STORING appears in the display.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 243 10 Audio

Radio functions

When the search is completed, AUTO down the button until STATION down the button until STATION STORING will no longer be displayed. If there STORED is displayed. STORED is displayed. 10 are no stations with sufficient signal strength, The radio will then exit auto-store mode and The SCAN function will be deactivated and the is displayed. NO AST FOUND the stored station can be selected by pressing station can be selected by pressing the preset The auto-stored stations can be selected using the preset button. button. the preset buttons (2). Press EXIT (6) to terminate the automatic Scanning Radio text storing function. SCAN (4) automatically searches through the Certain stations broadcast program informa- When the radio is in auto-store mode, AUTO is selected waveband for strong AM or FM sta- tion, which can be shown in the display. tions. When the radio finds a station, that sta- shown in the display. AUTO disappears when To start this function: you return to normal radio mode, which can be tion will be played for approximately 8 sec- 1. Select FM1 or FM2 and press the MENU done by briefly pressing AM/FM (1), EXIT (6), onds, after which scanning resumes. button. or AUTO (7). Activating/deactivating SCAN 2. Press ENTER. To return to the Auto-store mode, press the 1. Select radio mode using the AM/FM but- AUTO button briefly and select a stored station ton (2). 3. Select RADIOTEXT in the menu and press by pressing one of the preset buttons (2). 2. Press SCAN to activate the function. ENTER. Saving auto-stored stations in the preset SCAN is shown in the display. To deactivate this function, select again and press . memory 3. Press the SCAN or EXIT button to deacti- RADIOTEXT ENTER An auto-stored station can be saved in the vate the scan function and listen to the memory for manually preset stations. selected station.

1. Press AUTO (7) briefly. Storing a station found with SCAN > Auto is displayed. A station can be stored as a preset while the 2. Press one of the preset buttons (2) under SCAN function is activated. which the station is to be stored. Hold Press one of the preset buttons (2) under which the station is to be stored. Hold

Information Provided by:Provided Information 244 10 Audio

Radio functions

The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid" HD Radio reception (U.S. How HD broadcasting works ൅ since it is both analogue and digital. During 1 HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio models only) hybrid operation, receivers still continue to and broadcasts of this type are available in 10 Introduction receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD many areas of the United States. However, radio receivers incorporate both modes of there are a few key differences: reception, where the receiver will automatically Instead of transmitting one analogue sig- switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal • nal, stations send out a bundled signal – cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver. both analogue and digital. When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, the symbol will appear in the audio sys- • An HD radio receiver can receive both dig- ital and analogue broadcasts. Depending tem display. on the terrain and location of the vehicle More information about HD radio and IBOC (which will influence the signal strength), can be found on Ibiquity's website, the receiver will determine which signal to www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com. receive.

Benefits of digital broadcasting Limitations • Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality • Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio and AM as analogue FM). only): The main channel is the only channel broadcast that can receive in hybrid mode (both dig- • Some FM frequencies offer a greater num- ital and analogue). If a frequency has sub- HD radio is a brand name registered by the ber of listening choices through “multicast- Ibiquity digital corporation2. They are the channels, they are broadcast in digital ing” (consisting of a frequency's main mode only. The main FM channel will be developer of a broadcasting technology called channel and any sub-channels that may IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC also be available on that particular fre- (Volvo uses the symbol > to indicate there the method of transmitting a digital radio quency. See also the section "Sub-chan- are sub-channels available) The sub-FM broadcast signal centered on the same fre- nels" below). quency as the AM or FM station's present fre- • When receiving a digital signal there is no quency. multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/ crackling due to outside influences.

1 HD Radio(TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. HD Radio(TM) is only available in vehicles not equipped with the optional integrated CD changer. 2 HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.  Information Provided by:Provided Information 245 10 Audio

Radio functions

channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2 NOTE 3. Press ENTER to turn HD off (the X will dis- WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc. appear from the box on the display screen). 10 There may be a noticeable difference in • Reception coverage area: Due to current sound quality when a change from analogue This will disable the radio's capability to receive IBOC transmitter power limitations, the to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such digital broadcasts but it will continue to func- reception coverage area in digital mode is as: tion as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM somewhat more limited than the station's receiver. Please note that when HD is switched Volume increase or decrease analogue coverage area. Please be aware • off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-chan- that as with any radio broadcast technol- • Equalizer settings, i.e. Bass/ Midrange/ nels (see the following section for a more ogy, terrain, time of day, foliage level and Treble cut or boost detailed explanation of sub-channels). building location can have positive or neg- Time alignment (Digital program mate- • Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to reactivate HD ative effects on radio reception. rial in extreme cases can be as much as (an X will appear in the box on the display • Analogue to digital/digital to analogue 8 seconds behind the analogue). This screen). blending: Analogue to digital blending will will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect. occur as the signal strength reaches a pre- The above items are dependant on the Sub-channels set threshold in the receiver. This will be broadcaster's equipment settings and do noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio reception) and is normal. receiver or antenna systems.

Switching HD on or off The factory setting for HD radio is on. However, when driving through areas with weak HD sig- nals (fringe areas), you may experience that the radio repeatedly switches between analogue/ digital and digital/analogue reception. If this happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off. To do so: 1. Be sure the audio system is switched on and in AM or FM mode. 2. Press MENU in the center console control Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels panel.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 246 10 Audio

Radio functions

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM NOTE Listening to satellite radio wavebands only) will also have sub-channels The Sirius satellite system consists of a number When the radio has gone into HD mode, 10 offering additional types of programming or • of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous it may take several seconds before the music. orbit. ">" symbol (if the current frequency has In such cases, the “>” symbol will be displayed any sub-channels) is displayed to the to the left of the frequency number and a num- right of the frequency. Pressing the NOTE ber will be displayed to the right of the fre- arrow keys before the number is dis- • The digital signals from the Sirius satel- quency number indicating that the currently played will cause the radio to tune to the lites are line-of-sight, which means that tuned frequency has at least one sub-channel. next available radio station, not to the physical obstructions such as bridges, The "2" in the illustration indicates that you are current station's sub-channels. tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere currently listening to the first sub-channel on • When you are no longer in broadcasting with signal reception. frequency 93.9. range of the currently tuned sub-chan- • Avoid any obstructions, such as metal- Selecting sub-channels nel, No HD reception will be dis- lic objects transported on roof racks or To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press played. The radio will then be muted in a ski box, or other antennas that may and it will be necessary to tune to or the right arrow key on the center console or on impede signals from the SIRIUS satel- search for a new radio station. the steering wheel keypad. To go back to the lites. main channel, press the left arrow key. To go to subchannel 2 (if available), press the right Sub-channels can also be stored as presets, Selecting Sirius radio mode arrow key. see page 243 for information on storing sta- 1. Press Power to switch on the audio system tions. If you are currently tuned to a frequency's main (see page 243 for information on the stand- channel, pressing the left arrow key will tune to If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it ard radio functions). the next lower radio frequency. may take up to 6 seconds before the channel 2. Press the MODE button repeatedly until becomes audible. If you press this button while Sirius 1 or 2 is displayed. you are out of digital range of the transmitter, No HD reception will be displayed. Activating Sirius radio 1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no audio, which means that the channel is unsubscribed and the text "Call 888-539- SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE" is displayed

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 247 10 Audio

Radio functions

(see also "Selecting a channel" in the right 5. Use the left or right arrow keys to select a 1. Press MENU and scroll to "Direct channel column). channel in the currently chosen category. entry." 10 2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474). 6. Press ENTER to listen to a channel. 2. Use the numerical keypad to enter the channel's number. 3. When asked for the Sirius ID number press AUTO to display this number. It is also NOTE 3. Press ENTER. The radio will tune to this possible to retrieve the Sirius ID from the • The category "All" is default, which ena- channel, even if it belongs to a category MENU. bles you to scroll through the entire list other than the currently selected one. 4. "UPDATING SUBSCRIPTION" will be of available satellite channels. displayed while the subscription is being • The channel categories are automati- NOTE updated, after which the display will return cally updated several times a year. This • The numbers of skipped or locked to the normal view. takes approximately two minutes and channels will not be displayed. will interrupt normal broadcasting. A SIRIUS ID message will be displayed while updat- • If a channel is locked, the access code must be entered before the channel can The SIRIUS ID is required when contacting the ing is in progress. Information on chan- nel or feature updates is available at be selected. See "Unlocking a channel" Sirius Call Center. It is used to activate your on page 249. account and when making any account trans- www.sirius.com. actions. The SIRIUS ID is sometimes referred to as the Electronic Serial Number (ESN). Selecting a channel Scanning There are three ways of tuning in a channel: Selecting a channel category NOTE 1. Select Sirius radio mode as described • Using the left and right arrow keys SCAN automatically searches through the above. By turning the tuning control • list of satellite channels, see page 244 for 2. Press ENTER. • Through direct channel entry more detailed information. 3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll Direct channel entry through the list of categories. The Sirius satellite channels are numbered Storing a channel A long press on one of the number keys 4. Press ENTER or the right arrow key to consecutively throughout all of the categories. • stores the currently tuned channel on that select a category. To access a channel directly: key. • A short press on a number key while the radio is in Sirius 1 or 2 mode will tune to the

Information Provided by:Provided Information 248 10 Audio

Radio functions

preset satellite channel stored on that but- Song seek Advanced settings ton, regardless of the currently selected When a satellite radio channel plays one of the This menu function enables you to make set- 10 channel category. songs stored in the song memory, the listener tings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions. will be alerted by a text message and an audi- To access this menu: ble signal. Song Seek and Song Memory 1. Press MENU. The Song Seek and Song Memory functions Press ENTER to listen to the song or 2. Scroll to Sirius menu. provide both audio and visual notification when EXIT to cancel. Sirius is broadcasting your favorite songs. To activate/deactivate the song seek function: 3. Select Advanced Sirius settings. Song Seek enables you to store the name of the song for future advance notification when 1. Press MENU WARNING that song is being played. The Song Memory 2. Scroll to "Song seek" feature makes it possible to view all of the cur- Settings should be made when the vehicle rent songs that are stored in memory. 3. Press ENTER to activate or deactivate the is at a standstill. function. Song memory The following settings can be made in the Sir- Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's NOTE ius menu. memory. When the song has ended, the radio will • Songs can be added to the song list 1. Press MENU. remain tuned to the channel on which the • Channel skip settings can be made song was played. 2. Scroll to "Add song to song mem." and • Channel lock settings can be made follow the instructions shown in the dis- The channel access code can be displayed play. Radio text • or changed The text that is displayed about the song that If a new song is selected when the memory is is currently playing can be changed. Use the • Your Sirius ID can be displayed full, you will be prompted to press ENTER to AUTO button or the menu to display the Artist, delete the last song on the list. Skip options , or switch . Title, Composer radio text off This function is used to remove a channel from NOTE the list of available channels. The remaining songs in the list will move Skip current down one position, and the newly added 1. Select CHANNEL SKIP LIST and press song will be placed at the top of the list. ENTER.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 249 10 Audio

Radio functions

2. Select a category in the list and press 3. Enter the channel access code and press 1. Select CHANGE CODE and press ENTER. ENTER. ENTER. 10 3. Skip channels in the list presented by 4. Select a category in the list and press 2. Enter the current code and press ENTER. pressing ENTER or right arrow key. ENTER. 3. Enter the code and press ENTER. 5. Lock channels in the list presented by Unskip all channels 4. Confirm the new code and press ENTER. This permanently removes all channels from pressing ENTER or right arrow. If an incorrect code is entered, the text the skip list and makes them available for The channel is now locked and a checked box WRONG CODE! is displayed. selection. will be displayed to indicate this. It will be nec- essary to enter the channel access code1 in If you have forgotten the access code: Temp. unskip all ch. order to listen to a locked channel. This function will temporarily unskip all chan- 1. Select "SIRIUS ID" in the Sirius settings nels and make them available for selection. The Unlocking a channel: menu and press ENTER. A channel's access code1 is required to unlock channels remain on the skip list and will again 2. Press and hold the ENTER button for a channel. be skipped the next time the ignition is 2 seconds. switched on. Unlock all channels 3. The current code will be displayed. This permanently removes all channels from Channel lock the locked list and makes them available for Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with Access to specific channels can be restricted selection. assistance. (locked). A locked channel will not provide audio, song titles, or artist information. Temp. unlock all ch. SIRIUS ID This function will temporarily unlock all chan- This function displays the 12-digit Sirius acti- NOTE nels and make them available for selection. The vation ID. channels remain on the locked list and will All channels are initially unlocked. again be locked the next time the ignition is switched on. Locking a channel CHANGE CODE 1. Select "Sirius ID" in the menu and select This function makes it possible to change the LOCK OPTIONS and press ENTER. channel access code. The default code 2. Select CHANNEL LOCK LIST and press is 0000. ENTER To change the code:

Information Provided by:Provided Information 250 10 Audio

CD player/CD changer

CD function controls Playing a CD NOTE Single CD player • Ensure that INSERT DISC is displayed 10 Start the CD player by pressing the MODE but- before inserting a disc. ton (5) and inserting a disc in the slot (4). If there • If a CD position in the changer contain- is already a disc inserted, it will begin to play. ing a disc is selected, and the audio system is in CD mode when it is NOTE switched on, the CD will play automati- cally. If a CD is in the slot when the audio system is in CD mode, the CD will be played auto- matically. CD eject Eject from Single CD player CD changer* Press the eject button (3) to eject the disc.

G026367 The CD changer can hold up to six discs. Eject from CD changer 1. Start the CD changer by pressing the This function makes it possible to eject a single MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL–press MODE button (5). disc, or to eject all of the discs in the changer. the up or down arrow keys to scroll in a 2. Select an empty position using the 1 – 6 Press the eject button (3) briefly to eject the menu, or the keys on the left/right sides of buttons or the up/down keys on the MENU disc that is currently playing. the control to change CD tracks/fast for- NAVIGATION CONTROL. The display ward/back A longer press (more than two seconds) shows which positions are empty. Buttons for selecting a disc in the starts the process of ejecting all of the 3. Insert a disc into the slot (4). optional CD changer discs in the changer. CD eject button CD slot MODE button TUNING dial for selecting tracks

 Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251 10 Audio

CD player/CD changer

NOTE time that this takes depends on the quality of NOTE the disc. 10 • The EJECT ALL function can only be The TUNING dial (6) (turn clockwise to go to used while the vehicle is at a standstill Navigating the disc and playing tracks the next track/file, or counterclockwise to and will be cancelled if the vehicle If a disc with audio files is in the CD player, go to the previous track/file) or the steering begins to move. press ENTER to display a list of folders on the wheel keypad can also be used for this pur- pose. • For reasons of traffic safety, the ejected disc. CD must be removed within 12 seconds Use the up and down arrows in the navigation Fast forward/back or it will be automatically drawn back control (see the illustration on page 251) to into the slot and the CD player will enter Press and hold down the left or right arrows move among the folders on the disc. Audio files pause mode. Press the CD button to keys in the menu navigation control (or the restart the disc. have the symbol and folders containing corresponding keys on the optional steer- these files have the symbol. Press ing wheel keypad) to search within a track/ ENTER to play a selected folder or a file. CD Pause file or the whole disc. The search continues for as long as the buttons are held down. When the audio system volume is turned off When the music file has been played, the completely, the CD player will pause and will player will continue to play the rest of the files Random play resume playing when the volume is turned up in the current folder. When all of the files in the This function plays the tracks/files on a CD (or again. folder have been played, the player will auto- on all of the CDs if the vehicle is equipped with matically go to the next folder and play the files Audio files the optional CD changer) in random order in it. (shuffle). In addition to playing normal music CDs, the Press the left or right arrow key on the naviga- CD player/changer can also play discs con- Activating/deactivating the random taining files in mp3 or wma format. tion control if the entire name of the current track does not fit in the display. function-CD player If a normal CD is being played: NOTE Changing tracks 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. Certain discs that are copy protected can- Briefly press the left or right arrow keys on the not be read by the player. MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL to skip to the 2. Select Random and press ENTER. previous or next track/file. If a CD with audio files is being played: When a disc with audio files is inserted in the 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. player, the player scans the disc's folders 2. Select Random and press ENTER. before it begins playing the files. The length of

Information Provided by:Provided Information 252 10 Audio

CD player/CD changer

3. Select Disc or Folder and press ENTER. 1. Press MENU. Select the menu for relevant NOTE sound source and press ENTER. Activating/deactivating the random • The Eject all function can only be used 10 function-CD changer 2. Select Disc text in the menu and press while the vehicle is at a standstill and will ENTER. be cancelled if the vehicle begins to If a normal CD is being played: > If information is stored on the disc, it will move. 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. now appear in the display. • For reasons of traffic safety, the ejected 2. Select Random and press ENTER. To deactivate this function, select Disc text in CD must be removed within 12 seconds or it will be automatically drawn back 3. Select Single disc or All discs and press the menu and press ENTER. into the slot and the CD player will enter ENTER. Scan pause mode. Press the CD button to If a CD with audio files is being played: This function plays the first 10 seconds of each restart the disc. 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. track/file on the CD. 2. Select and press . Random ENTER Press SCAN. Compact disc care 3. Select Single disc or Folder and press Press EXIT or SCAN to stop the scan func- Keep the following in mind when playing/han- ENTER. tion and listen to an entire track/file. dling compact discs

CD eject • Do not put tape or labels on the disc itself. NOTE They could become stuck in the player. Single CD player • CDR discs can cause listening problems CD changer only–you can only select the Press the eject button (3) to eject the disc. next random track/file on the current disc. due to the quality of the disc or recording CD changer equipment used. This function makes it possible to eject a single Press the EXIT button to stop random play. • DualDisc: The audio side of a DualDisc disc, or to eject all of the discs in the changer. The random function is automatically deacti- (combined CD/DVD) does not meet CD vated when another disc is selected. • Press the eject button (3) briefly to eject the specifications and may not play in your disc that is currently playing. audio system. Disc text (CD changer only) • A longer press (more than two seconds) • Keep the discs clean. Wipe them with a Certain CDs contain information about the starts the process of ejecting all of the soft, clean, lint-free cloth, working from the disc, such as the titles of the tracks, etc. This discs in the changer. center outward. If necessary, dampen the information can be shown in the display by cloth with a neutral soap solution. Dry thor- activating the DISC TEXT function. oughly before using.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 253 10 Audio

CD player/CD changer

• Never use cleaning spray or antistatic liq- uid. Use only cleaners specifically made for 10 CDs. • Use discs of the correct size only (3.5" discs should never be used). • Volvo does not recommend the use of plastic outer rings on the disc. • Condensation may occur on discs/optical components of the changer in cold winter weather. The disc can be dried with a clean, lint-free cloth. Optical components in the CD changer may, however, take up to one hour to dry off. • Never attempt to play a damaged CD. • When not in use, the discs should be stored in their covers. Avoid storing discs in excessive heat, direct sunlight or in dusty locations.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 254 10 Audio

Audio menu

FM1/FM2 menu 1. RADIOTEXT ON/OFF 10 2. ADVANCED RADIO SETTINGS 3. AUDIO SETTINGS

AM menu 1. AUDIO SETTINGS

CD menu 1. RANDOM 2. AUDIO SETTINGS

CD changer menu 1. RANDOM 2. DISC TEXT ON/OFF 3. AUDIO SETTINGS

AUX menu 1. AUX VOLUME 2. SOUND SETTINGS

Information Provided by:Provided Information 255 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Introduction and other controls on the cell phone can The symbol indicates that the hands-free always be used regardless of whether or not system is active. 10 the phone is connected to the hands-free sys- tem. A long press on the PHONE button deactivates the hands-free system and disconnects the cell phone. NOTE Not all cell phones are fully compatible with Connecting cell phones the hands-free system. A list of compatible The procedure for connecting a cell phone var- phones is available at your Volvo retailer or ies, depending on the phone itself, and on at www.volvocars.us whether or not the phone has been previously connected. WARNING If this is the first time the phone is to be con- nected to the hands-free system, proceed as Never use the hands-free feature or any follows: G029503 other device in your vehicle in a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely. Alternative 1–using the vehicle's menus System overview Distraction can lead to a serious accident. Cell phone 1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth® func- tion (refer to the phone’s owner’s manual if Location of the microphone Getting started necessary) or go to www.volvocars.com Center console control panel and display Use the controls in the center console (3) to 2. Activate the vehicle’s Bluetooth® hands- access, navigate and make selections in the free system by briefly pressing the Bluetooth® hands-free hands-free system’s menus (see page 260). PHONE button. This feature makes it possible to set up a wire- Activating/deactivating > Add phone will be displayed. If one or less connection between a Bluetooth -ena- Ÿ A short press on the PHONE button in the cen- more cell phones are already registered bled cell phone and the vehicle’s audio system. ter console activates the hands-free system. in the system, they will also be dis- This enables the audio system to function as a The text TELEPHONE will appear at the top of played. hands-free connection and allows you to the display to indicate that the audio system is remote-control a number of the phone’s func- 3. Select Add phone. in telephone mode. tions. The microphone used by this system is located in the ceiling console (2). The buttons

Information Provided by:Provided Information 256 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

> The audio system will search for cell The cell phone will be registered and will be the driver’s door is opened on vehicles equip- phones that are in range. This search connected automatically to the audio system ped with the optional keyless drive). takes approximately 30 seconds. Any while the text 10 Synchronising is displayed. For When the cell phone is disconnected from the phones detected will be displayed with more information on synchronizing a cell hands-free system, a call in progress can be ® their Bluetooth names. The hands-free phone, see page 259. continued using the cell phone’s own speaker ® system’s Bluetooth name will appear When a connection has been established, the and microphone. in the cell phone’s display as . My Car symbol and the cell phone’s Bluetooth® 4. Select one of the cell phones shown in the name will be displayed. The cell phone can NOTE audio system’s (center console) display. now be controlled from the audio system. Certain cell phones may require confirma- tion from the phone’s keypad when a call is 5. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the Making a call digits shown in the audio system’s display. transferred from hands-free to the cell 1. Ensure that TELEPHONE is shown at the phone. Alternative 2–using the cell phone’s menus top of the center console display and that 1. Activate the hands-free system by briefly the symbol is visible (by pressing briefly pressing the PHONE button in the center on PHONE on the center console). Handling calls console. If there is a cell phone connected, 2. Dial the desired phone number or use the Incoming calls disconnect it from the hands-free system phone book (see page 259). Press ENTER to answer a call, even if the (by pressing PHONE in the center console 3. Press ENTER. audio system is currently in e.g., CD or FM for several seconds). mode. End the call by pressing EXIT. 2. Perform a search using the cell phone’s Press EXIT to defer a call. ® Bluetooth function (consult the cell Disconnecting the cell phone phone’s owner’s manual if necessary). The cell phone is automatically disconnected Automatic answer 3. Select My Car in the list of devices shown from the audio system if it is moved out of This function means that incoming calls will be in the cell phone’s display. range. For more information about connec- answered automatically. Activate or deactivate tions, see page 256. the function in the menu system under Phone 4. When prompted, enter the PIN code 1234 settings Call options Automatic in the cell phone. The cell phone can be manually disconnected answer. from the hands-free system by pressing 5. Connect to My Car from the cell phone. PHONE. The hands-free system is also deac- tivated when the ignition is switched off (or if

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 257 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Call settings Sound settings Sounds and volume Ring signal Ring While a call is in progress, press MENU or signal 1,2,3.... 10 ENTER on the center console to access the Call volume following functions: Call volume can be adjusted when the hands- free system is activated. Use the buttons in the NOTE • Microphone off–mute the audio system’s steering wheel keypad or the audio system’s The connected cell phone’s ring tone is not microphone. volume control. switched off when one of the hands-free • Transfer call to mobile–transfer the call system's ringing tones is used. from hands-free to the cell phone. Audio system volume While a phone call is in progress, volume for • Phone book–this feature enables you to If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s the audio system can be adjusted in the normal search for a stored telephone number. ring tone1, go to Phone settings Sounds way with the audio system's volume control. In order to adjust volume during a phone call, the and volume Ring signal Use mobile NOTE audio system must be switched to one of the phone signal • On certain cell phones, the connection other modes (FM, CD, etc). is broken when the mute function is Audio system sound can be automatically More information about registering used, which is normal. If this happens, muted when a phone call is received in Phone and connecting cell phones the hands-free system will prompt you A maximum of 5 cell phones can be registered to reconnect. settings Sounds and volume Mute radio and adjust the volume with the / in the hands-free system. Registration only • A new call cannot be initiated while needs to be done once for each phone. After keys on the center console. another call is in progress. registration, the cell phone no longer needs to Ringing volume be in sight or searchable. Only one cell phone Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume can be connected to hands-free at a time. Phones can be unregistered in Bluetooth Ring volume and adjust the volume with Remove telephone the / keys on the center console. Automatic connection Ringing tones When the hands-free system is active and the The hands-free system’s integrated ringing most recently connected cell phone is within tones can be selected in Phone settings range, it is detected automatically. When the

1 Not supported by all cell phones.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 258 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection audio system searches for the most recently made in the phone book of the currently con- Voice control connected phone, this phone’s name appears nected cell phone. If the cell phone that is currently connected in the display. To manually connect a different allows calls to be made via voice commands, 10 cell phone, press EXIT. NOTE this function can be used by pressing and hold- ing ENTER. Manual connection If a particular cell phone does not support To connect a phone other than the one that copying of the phone book, List is empty Voice mail number will be displayed when copying has been was most recently connected or to switch The phone number to your voice mail can be completed. between cell phones that are already regis- changed in the menu Phone settings Call tered in the hands-free system: options Voice mail number. If no number If the phone book contains information about 1. Put the audio system in telephone mode. someone who is trying to call you, this infor- has been stored, this menu can be accessed 2. Press PHONE in the center console and mation will be shown in the display. by a prolonged press on button 1. Once a select one of the phones on the list. phone number has been stored, press and hold 1 to dial this number. A connection can also be established in the Searching for contacts The easiest way to search for a contact in the menu system under Bluetooth Connect phone book is to press and hold any of the Call lists phone or Change phone. buttons 2–9 (see the illustration on page 256). Lists of calls in a particular cell phone are cop- This starts a search based on the first letter on ied to the hands-free system each time that Phone book the button that has been pressed. phone is connected. These lists are then upda- ted while the phone is connected. Press In order to use the hands-free system’s phone The phone book can also be accessed by ENTER to show the most recently dialed num- book (list of contacts), TELEPHONE must be pressing the navigation buttons / on the bers. Other call lists can be found under Call displayed at the top of the center console dis- center console or by pressing / on the register. play and the symbol must be visible. steering wheel keypad. A search can also be The audio system stores a copy of the phone made in the phone book’s search menu in NOTE book of each registered cell phone. The phone Phone book Search: Certain cell phones display the list of the book is automatically copied each time a most recently dialed numbers in reverse phone is connected. This function can be acti- 1. Enter the first letter of the contact’s name and press ENTER or simply press ENTER. order. vated in Phone settings Synchronise phone book. Searches for contacts are only 2. Select the desired contact and press ENTER to make a call to that person.

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 259 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Entering text Button Function 5.4. Connect fr. mobile phone Text is entered by using the number buttons in 6. Phone settings 10 the center console. Press a button once to T U V 8 Ü Ù enter the first letter on the button, twice to enter 6.1. Call options the second letter, etc. Continue to press the W X Y Z 9 6.1.2. Automatic answer button to display other characters. 6.1.3. Voice mail number Press EXIT briefly to erase a character. Press Press briefly if two characters are 6.2. Sounds and volume and hold EXIT to erase all of the characters that to be entered in succession from have been entered. Use the / buttons on the same button. 6.3. IDIS the center console to navigate among the char- 6.4. Synchronize phone book acters. + 0 @ * # & $ £ / %

Button Function Shift between uppercase and lowercase letters Space .1-? ! , : " ' ( )

Bluetooth® menus A B C 2 Ä Å À Æ Ç 1. Missed calls D E F 3 È É 2. Received calls 3 Dialed calls G H I 4 Ì 4. Phone book 4.1. Search J K L 5 4.2. Copy fr. mobile phone M N O 6 Ñ Ö Ò Ø 5. Bluetooth... 5.1. Change phone P Q R S 7 ß 5.2. Connect phone 5.3. Disconnect phone

Information Provided by:Provided Information 260 10 Audio

10

Information Provided by:Provided Information 261 262 ov rgas...... 277 Volvo programs...... 276 Three-way catalyticconverter...... 274 Electrical system...... 272 Engine specifications...... 271 Engine oil...... Fuel, oils,andfluids...... 266 Dimensions andweights...... 264 Label information...... I nf or mat i on Pr ov i ded by : 269

G000000 SPECIFICATIONS 11

Information Provided by:Provided Information 11 Specifications

Label information

11

Information Provided by:Provided Information 264 11 Specifications

Label information

Model plate Vehicle Emission Control Information Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Codes for Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable color and upholstery, etc. emission standards, as evidenced by the cer- tification label on the underside of the hood. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety For further information regarding these regula- Standards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) tions, please consult your Volvo retailer. and Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) 11 standards (Canada) Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety standards, as evidenced by the certifi- cation label on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). For fur- ther information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer.

Loads and Tire Pressures The appearance of the decal will vary, depend- ing on the market for which the vehicle is intended. Canadian models have the upper decal. U.S. models have the lower decal.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)1 The VIN plate is located on the top left surface of the dashboard. The VIN is also stamped on the right hand door pillar.

1 The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) should always be quoted in correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 265 11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

Dimensions

11

Position Dimension A 103.9 in. (264 cm)

B Length 175.9 in. (447 cm)

C Load length, floor 33.5 in. (85 cm)

D Trunk lid up 7.9 in. (20 cm)

E1 Height 57.2 in. (145 cm)

E2 Height 78.7 in. (200 cm)

F Load height, roof up 20.4 in. (52 cm) Load height, roof down 10.2 in. (26 cm)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 266 11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

Position Dimension G Track, front 60.1 in. (155 cm)

H Track, rear 61.4 in. (156 cm)

I Load width, floor 28 in. (71 cm) 11 J Width 72.3 in. (184 cm)

K Width encl. door mirrors 79.6 in. (202 cm)

Weights Category USA Canada Gross vehicle weight Manual: 4540 lbs 2060 kg Automatic: 4560 lbs 2070 kg

Capacity weight All models: 640 lbs 290 kg

Permissible axle weight, front All models: 2440 lbs 1110 kg

Permissible axle weight, rear All models: 2370 lbs 1075 kg

Curb weight All models: 3770–3800 lbs 1710–1725 kg

Max. trailer weight (w/o brakes) All models: 1540 lbs All models: 700 kg

Max. trailer weight (with brakes) All models: 2000 lbs All models: 900 kg

Max. tongue weight All models: 165 lbs All models: 75 kg

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 267 11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

CAUTION The maximum permissible axle loads and/ or the gross vehicle weight must not be exceeded.

11 WARNING When adding accessories, equipment, lug- gage and other cargo to your vehicle, the total capacity weight must not be exceeded.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 268 11 Specifications

Fuel, oils, and fluids

Specifications and capacities Category Specification Capacity Fuel tank Octane rating: unleaded gasoline, minimum 15.9 US gallons (60 liters) octane requirement AKI 87, recommended rat- ing AKI 91 or above. 11 Engine oil (with filter replacement) See page 271 for information on engine oil 6.1 US quarts (5.8 liters) specifications.

Automatic transmission oil JWS 3309 8.14 US quarts (7.7 liters)

Manual transmission oil BOT 350 M3 6-speed: 2.0 US quarts (1.9 liters) – turbo models

Coolant Volvo original coolant/antifreeze (50/50 mix- 10.5 US quarts (10 liters) – models with automatic ture of water and anti-freeze) transmission 10 US quarts (9.5 liters) – models with manual trans- mission

Brake fluid DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F (280 °C), P/N 0.63 US quarts (0.6 liters) 9437433

Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A or equivalent 1.3 US quarts (1.2 liters) – system and reservoir com- bined

Washer fluid reservoir Use washer fluid solvent in cold weather con- 6.8 US quarts (6.5 liters) ditions.

Air conditioning system Refrigerant – R134a 1.2 lbs. (530 grams)

 Information Provided by:Provided Information 269 11 Specifications

Fuel, oils, and fluids

NOTE The transmission oil does not normally need to be changed during the service life of the vehicle. However, it may be necessary to replace the oil if the vehicle is often driven in areas of sustained temperature extremes 11 (hot or cold), when towing a trailer over long distances, for prolonged driving in moun- tainous areas, or if the vehicle is often driven short distances in temperatures under 40 °F (5 °C).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 270 11 Specifications

Engine oil

Oil specifications good fuel economy and engine protection. See American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC the viscosity chart. symbol specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1. Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel economy, engine performance, or engine pro- tection. 11 Volume: 6.1 US qts (5.8 liters). Volume between the MIN and Max marks on the dipstick: approximately 1.4 US qts (1.3 lit- ers). Volvo recommends Castrol. G022917 Depending on your driving habits, premium or G023491 synthetic oils may provide superior fuel econ- Viscosity chart omy and engine protection. Consult your Volvo The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided into retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service Extreme engine operation three parts: technician for recommendations on premium Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40 • The upper section describes the oil's per- or synthetic oils. and complying with oil quality requirements are formance level. recommended for driving in areas of sustained Oil additives must not be used. • The center identifies the oil's viscosity. temperature extremes (hot or cold), when tow- ing a trailer over long distances, and for pro- • The lower section indicates whether the oil NOTE longed driving in mountainous areas. has demonstrated energy-conserving Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is properties in a standard test in comparison changed at the normal service intervals. to a reference oil. This oil is only used at customer request, at additional charge. Please consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Oil viscosity Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide

Information Provided by:Provided Information 271 11 Specifications

Engine specifications

Engine designation B5254T7

OutputA kW/rps 169/83 hp/rpm 227/5000 11 TorqueA Nm/rps 320/25-80 ft. lbs./rpm 236/1500-4800

No. of cylinders 5

Displacement (liters/cubic inches) 2.52/153.8

Bore (mm/in.) 83/3.27

Stroke (mm/in.) 93.2/3.67

Compression ratio 9.0:1

Spark plugs type Volvo kit no. 30650379 gap inches/mm 0.027 in./0.7mm tightening torque ft. lbs./Nm 22.5 ft. lbs./30 Nm

A The engine specifications for output and torque listed in this table are based on the use of premium fuel.

Charge air cooler (Intercooler) pressed inlet air. The resulting increase in air cooler (which resembles a radiator) is located Turbocharged engines employ a turbo-com- flow raises pressure in the intake manifold and between the turbo-compressor and inlet mani- pressor to force air into the engine inlet mani- increases engine power over that developed by fold. fold and a charge air cooler to cool the com- the normally-aspirated engine. The charge air

Information Provided by:Provided Information 272 11 Specifications

Engine specifications

Fuel system The engine is equipped with a multiport fuel injection system.

11

Information Provided by:Provided Information 273 11 Specifications

Electrical system

General information If the battery must be replaced, replace it with 12-volt system with voltage controlled gener- one with the same cold start capacity and ator. Single wire system in which the chassis reserve capacity as the original (see the decal and engine block are used as conductors, on the battery). grounded on the chassis. WARNING 11 Battery PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Voltage 12 V 12 V Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- sories contain lead and lead compounds, Cold start capacity 600 AA 700 AB chemicals known to the state of California (CCA) to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Reserve capacity 120 min 135 min (RC)

Capacity (Ah) 70 80

A Models equipped with the High Performance audio system. B Models equipped with the Premium Sound audio system, the Volvo Navigation System and/or keyless drive.

Bulbs used in the car Bulb Output Type Low beam headlight 55W H7

High beam headlight 55W H9

Extra high beam (models with Dual Xenon headlights only) 55W H7

Information Provided by:Provided Information 274 11 Specifications

Electrical system

Bulb Output Type Brake light, back-up light, rear fog light 21W P21W

Turn signal, front/rear 21W PY21W

Turn signal, front/rear (applies to models with halogen headlights) 24W P21/5W 11 Rear parking light, side marker light 4W P21/4W

Footwell lighting, cargo compartment light, license plate lighting 5W C5W

Vanity mirror 1.2W Festoon

Front parking light, side turn signal 5W W5W

Front fog light* 55W H11

Glove compartment light 3W Festoon

NOTE For information regarding any other bulbs not mentioned in this section, please con- tact your Volvo retailer or a trained and authorized Volvo service technician.

Information Provided by:Provided Information

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 275 11 Specifications

Three-way catalytic converter

Three-way catalytic converter – NOTE general information Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain three-way catalytic converters. engine malfunctions, particularly involving the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition systems, may cause unusually high three- 11 way catalytic converter temperatures. Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of power or other unusual operating condi- tions, such as engine overheating or back- firing. A properly tuned engine will help avoid malfunctions that could damage the three-way catalytic converter. • Do not park your vehicle over combustible materials, such as grass or leaves, which can come into contact with the hot exhaust system and cause such materials to ignite under certain wind and weather condi- tions. • Excessive starter cranking (in excess of one minute), or an intermittently firing or flooded engine can cause three-way cata- lytic converter or exhaust system over- heating. • Remember that tampering or unauthorized modifications to the engine, the Electronic Control Module, or the vehicle may be ille- gal and can cause three-way catalytic con- verter or exhaust system overheating. This includes:

Information Provided by:Provided Information 276 11 Specifications

Volvo programs

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON CALL roadside assistance. Additional informa- tion, features, and benefits are described in a separate information package in your glove compartment. 11 If you require assistance, dial: In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63- VOLVO) In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup- ports certification by the National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi- fied technicians have demonstrated a high degree of competence in specific areas. Besides passing exams, each technician must also have worked in the field for two or more years before a certificate is issued. These pro- fessional technicians are best able to analyze vehicle problems and perform the necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at peak operating condition.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 277 12 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Audio system Automatic transmission - Geartronic...... 148 audio functions...... 238 AUX port...... 238 12-volt socket...... 114 automatic sound control...... 242 Axle weight...... 182, 267 12-volt sockets...... 58 AUX port...... 238 CD changer...... 251 CD player/changer...... 251 B A compact disc care...... 253 Dolby Surround Pro Logic II...... 241 Bass...... 240 A/C (air conditioning)...... 82 equalizer...... 241 HD digital radio...... 245 Battery 12 ABS (anti-lock brake system)...... 150 menu settings...... 255 maintenance...... 219 Airbags radio functions...... 243 remote key, replacing...... 119 front...... 22 selecting a sound source...... 238 specifications...... 274 inflatable curtain...... 30 Sirius satellite radio...... 247 warning symbols...... 219 side impact...... 29 sound settings...... 240 Battery – replacing...... 220 steering wheel keypad...... 239 Airbag system...... 22 Black Box (Vehicle Event Data)...... 208 storing radio stations...... 243 Air conditioning...... 82 subwoofer...... 241 Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 162 Air distribution table...... 88 USB/iPodŸ connector...... 239 Bluetooth cell phone connection...... 256 Air vents...... 84 Auto-dim rearview mirror...... 72 Booster cushion Alarm system...... 130 Autolock...... 75 accessory...... 41 turning off sensors...... 131 Automatic locking retractor...... 34 Brake fluid...... 217, 269 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)...... 150 Automatic sound control...... 242 Brake lights...... 59 Approach lighting...... 76 Automatic transmission...... 147 Brake system Audio files...... 252 kickdown...... 148 anti-lock brakes (ABS)...... 150 oil...... 269 emergency brake assistance...... 151 shiftlock override...... 149

Information Provided by:Provided Information 278 12 Index

fluid...... 217 Child safety...... 33 Cup holders...... 108, 111 general information...... 150 booster cushions...... 41 Curb weight...... 182, 267 Bulbs child restraint systems...... 35 headlights...... 221 Climate system list of...... 274 air distribution...... 88 D Bulbs, replacing...... 221 air vents...... 84 Electronic Climate Control...... 85 Detachable key blade...... 120 passenger compartment filter...... 82 Detachable trailer hitch...... 160 refrigerant...... 82, 269 C Dimensions...... 266 Climate system, general information...... 82 12 Disconnecting the front passenger’s air- Capacities, fluids...... 269 Clock bag...... 26 Capacity weight...... 182, 267 setting...... 75 Display...... 56 Catalytic converter, three-way...... 276 Coat hanger...... 109 Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II)...... 241 CD changer...... 251 Cold weather precautions...... 137 Door mirrors...... 73 CD player...... 251 Compact disc care...... 253 Door Mounted Inflatable Curtain system Cell phone, hands-free connection...... 256 Compass in rearview mirror...... 72 (DMIC)...... 30 Central locking system - remote key...... 118 Conserving electrical current...... 138 Driving economically...... 136 Chains...... 185 Convertible top (Power retractable hard Driving through water...... 136 top)...... 100 Changing a wheel...... 188 DSTC, stability system...... 152 Child restraints Coolant...... 269 recalls and registration...... 43 changing...... 216 checking level of...... 216 Child restraint systems...... 35 E booster cushions...... 41 Courtesy lighting...... 106 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 42 Crash mode...... 32 Economical driving...... 136 Cruise control...... 65 Electrical current – conserving...... 138

Information Provided by:Provided Information 279 12 Index

Electrical system...... 274 F Fuel tank volume...... 269 Electronic Brake Force Distribution Fuses, replacing...... 228 (EBD)...... 151 Federal Clean Air Act...... 208 Electronic Climate Control Flat tires air distribution table...... 88 changing...... 188 G repairing with tire sealing system...... 190 Electronic Climate Control (ECC)...... 85 Fluids and oils...... 269 Gasoline requirements...... 139 Emergency brake...... 70 FM1/FM2 menu...... 243 Geartronic...... 148 Emergency locking retractor...... 34 Fog lights Glossary of tire terminology...... 181 12 Emergency starting...... 157 front...... 59 Glove compartment...... 109 Emergency towing...... 154 rear...... 60 locking...... 129 Emission inspection readiness...... 210 Front airbags...... 22 Gross vehicle weight (GVW)...... 182, 267 Engine disconnecting passenger’s side airbag 26 specifications...... 272 Front fog lights...... 59 starting...... 143 Front park assist...... 166 H starting with keyless drive...... 145 Front seats...... 92 Engine compartment overview...... 213 Hand brake (parking brake)...... 70 accessing the rear seat...... 92 Engine oil...... 214 adjusting the head restraints...... 98 Hazard warning flashers...... 69 changing...... 214 manually operated...... 92 HD digital radio...... 245 checking...... 214 power...... 96 Headlights...... 59 specifications...... 271 Fuel filler door changing bulbs...... 221 volumes...... 269 opening manually...... 60 high and low beams...... 61 Equalizer, audio system...... 241 unlocking...... 60 high beam flash...... 61 Eyelets for anchoring loads...... 114 Fuel gauge...... 49 Headlight washers...... 67 Fuel requirements...... 139 High beam flash...... 61

Information Provided by:Provided Information 280 12 Index

High beams...... 61 Instrument panel...... 46, 49 L Hoisting the vehicle...... 210 Instrument panel lighting...... 60 Label information...... 264 Home safe lighting...... 61, 76 Interior lighting...... 106 LATCH (ISOFIX) anchors...... 42 Hood, opening...... 212 iPodŸ connector (audio system)...... 239 Lighting panel...... 59 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 42 Load anchoring eyelets...... 114 I Locking J from the inside...... 128 Ignition switch...... 142 glove compartment...... 129 12 Immobilizer...... 143 Jacket hanger...... 109 Locking the vehicle...... 124 Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...... 118 Jump starting...... 157 Long distance trips...... 138 Indicator and warning symbols...... 49, 51 Long loads, ski hatch...... 115 Inflatable Curtain...... 30 K Lug nuts (wheel nuts)...... 187 Inflation pressure...... 175 Inflation pressure, checking...... 176 Key (ignition switch) positions...... 142 M Inflation pressure table Key blade...... 120, 125 Canadian models...... 178 Keyless drive Maintenance...... 208 US models...... 177 location of antennas (pacemaker warn- hoisting the vehicle...... 210 Information display...... 49, 56 ing)...... 126 performed by the owner...... 210 messages in...... 56 locking and unlocking the vehicle...... 124 Manual transmission...... 146 Information symbol...... 51 power seat memory...... 125 starting the engine...... 145 Mirrors...... 72 Inspection, preparing for...... 210 Keylock...... 143 Model plate...... 265 Inspection readiness...... 210 Kickdown...... 148 Motor oil...... 214, 271 Instrument overview...... 46 checking...... 214

Information Provided by:Provided Information 281 12 Index

O Power door mirrors...... 73 Rearview mirror...... 72 Power front seat...... 96 auto-dim function...... 72 Occupant safety...... 16 memory function...... 97 Rearview mirror with compass...... 72 Occupant weight sensor...... 26 Power retractable hard top Recalls, child restraints...... 43 Octane recommendations...... 139 cover...... 104 Refrigerant (A/C system)...... 82, 269 introduction...... 100 Oil...... 214 Refueling...... 141 messages...... 102 changing...... 214 fuel tank volume...... 269 checking...... 214 operating...... 102 trunk divider...... 101 Registering child restraints...... 43 On Call Roadside Assistance...... 277 12 wind blocker...... 104 Remote key...... 118 Opening the hood...... 212 Power steering fluid...... 217 battery replacement...... 119 Opening the trunk from the inside...... 129 functions...... 118 Power windows...... 71 Owner maintenance...... 210 key blade...... 120 Pregnancy, using seat belts during...... 19 Replacing fuses...... 228 Private locking...... 122 Reporting safety defects P Canada...... 17 USA...... 16 Panel lighting, instrument...... 60 R Roll-over protection system (ROPS)...... 31 Park assist...... 166 Radio Parking brake...... 70 Sirius satellite radio...... 247 Parking lights...... 59 Radio functions...... 243 S Passenger’s side front airbag, disabling. . . 26 HD digital radio...... 245 Safety, occupant...... 16 Periodic owner-performed maintenance. 210 Rain sensor - windshield wipers...... 68 Safety defects, reporting Permissible axle weight...... 182 Rear fog light...... 60 Canada...... 17 Personal settings...... 75 Rear park assist...... 166 USA...... 16

Information Provided by:Provided Information 282 12 Index

Seat belt Stability system...... 152 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 195 reminder...... 20 Dynamic Stability Traction Control Tires...... 172 Seat belts...... 18 (DSTC)...... 152 age...... 172 Automatic locking retractor/Emergency Starting the engine...... 143 changing...... 188 locking retractor...... 34 with keyless drive...... 145 changing from summer to winter...... 173 buckling...... 18 Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...... 118, 143 designations...... 179 guides...... 19 glossary of terms...... 181 STC, stability system...... 152 maintenance...... 20 improving economy...... 172 pretensioners...... 18 Steering wheel inflation...... 175 unbuckling...... 18 adjusting...... 69 inflation pressure, checking...... 176 12 use during pregnancy...... 19 keypad...... 239 inflation pressure table, Canadian mod- Seats, front...... 92 Storage compartments...... 108 els...... 178 inflation pressure table, US models.... 177 Shiftlock Studded tires...... 185 load ratings...... 176 override...... 149 Subwoofer...... 241 rotation...... 173 Side door mirrors...... 73 Supplemental restraint system...... 21 snow...... 185 Side impact airbags...... 29 spare...... 186 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags...... 29 speed ratings...... 176 T storing...... 173 Sirius satellite radio...... 247 studded...... 185 Ski hatch...... 115 Tachometer...... 49 tire pressure monitoring system...... 195 Snow chains...... 185 Temporary spare tire...... 186 tire sealing system...... 190 tread wear indicator...... 174 Snow tires...... 185 Three-way catalytic converter...... 276 uniform tire quality grading...... 184 Sound control, automatic...... 242 Tire inflation...... 175 winter driving...... 185 Sound settings, audio system...... 240 Tire inflation pressure Tire sealing system...... 190 Spare tire...... 186 Canadian models...... 178 US models...... 177

Information Provided by:Provided Information 283 12 Index

Towing a trailer...... 158 U Washer fluid reservoir...... 213, 216 trailer hitch...... 160 Water, driving through...... 136 Uniform Tire Quality Grading...... 184 Towing the vehicle...... 154 Weights...... 267 Trailer hitch - detachable...... 160 Wheel nuts...... 187 Trailer towing...... 158 V Wheels...... 172 Transmission changing...... 188 Geartronic...... 148 Valet locking...... 122 storing...... 173 manual...... 146 Vehicle dimensions...... 266 Wind blocker (power retractable hard top) shiftlock override...... 149 12 Vehicle Event Data...... 208 (Power retractable hard top)...... 104 Tread wear indicator...... 174 Vehicle loading...... 182 Windows Treble...... 240 power...... 71 Vehicle maintenance Trip computer...... 63 performed by the owner...... 210 Windshield washer fluid reservoir...... 213 Trips, long distance...... 138 Vehicle towing...... 154 Windshield wiper blades...... 218 Trunk Vehicle weights...... 267 Windshield wipers...... 67 loading...... 113 rains sensor...... 68 VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)...... 265 opening from the inside...... 129 Winter tires...... 185 opening mechanically...... 129 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance...... 277 Wiper blades Trunk divider (Power retractable hard replacing windshield wipers...... 218 top)...... 101 W Turn signals...... 61 indicator lights...... 49 Warning flashers, hazard...... 69 Warning symbol...... 51 Warranties...... 208 Washer fluid...... 216, 269

Information Provided by:Provided Information 284 Information Provided by:Provided Information        *  !9 # $%

Information Provided by:Provided Information